Soul (2012) - Car KIA - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Soul (2012) KIA

Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.

As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality, value for money prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.

All information contained in this Owner's Manual is accurate at the time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can be carried out.

This manual applies to all Kia models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to your specific Kia vehicle.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your Kia Dealer knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians, recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement parts and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.

Because subsequent owners require this important information as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is sold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warranties regarding your vehicle.

We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.

Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2011 Kia Canada Inc.

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Kia Canada Inc..

Printed in Korea

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

Index

I

Index

A

Active eco system....5-41

Advanced lighting speaker....4-111

Air bag warning label 3-56

Air bag warning light 3-35

Air bags 3-32

Air bag warning label 3-56

Air bag warning light 3-35

Curtain air bag....3-48

Driver's and passenger's front air bag....3-44

Occupant detection system 3-38

Side impact air bag....3-47

SRS components and functions 3-36

Air cleaner 7-34

Antenna (Roof) 4-109

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 5-28

Appearance care....7-66

Advanced lighting speaker 4-111

Aux, USB and iPod....4-111

Roof antenna 4-109

Steering wheel audio control 4-110

Automatic climate control system 4-85

Air conditioning 4-92

Automatic heating and air conditioning....4-87

Manual heating and air conditioning 4-88

Automatic transaxle 5-20

Sports mode 5-22

Automatic transaxle shift position indicator 4-49

Aux, USB and iPod 4-111

B

Base curb weight 5-57

Battery....7-38

Battery saver function....4-65

Before driving....5-3

Bottle holders, see cup holders....4-101

Brake system....5-25

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 5-28

Electronic stability control(ESC)....5-30

Hill-start assist control 5-33

Parking brake 5-26

Power brakes 5-25

Vehicle stability management 5-34

Brakes/clutch fluid 7-31

Bulb wattage....8-2

Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button....5-8

C

Camera(Rearview)......4-63

Capacities (Lubricants) 8-4

Care
Exterior care....7-66
Interior care....7-71
Tire care....7-41

Cargo capacity 5-53

Cargo screen 4-105

Cargo weight....5-57

Center console storage 4-98

Central door lock switch....4-18

Certification label 5-55

Certification label 8-7

Changing tires....6-14

Checking tire inflation pressure....7-42

Child restraint system....3-24

Lower anchor 3-29

Seat belt 3-26

Tether anchor system....3-28

Child-protector rear door lock....4-19

Cigarette lighter 4-100

Climate control air filter....4-84

Clothes hanger 4-103

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster 4-40

Compact spare tire....6-19

Compact spare tire replacement 7-45

Coolant....7-28

Cooling fluid, see engine coolant....7-28

Crankcase emission control system....7-72

Cruise control system 5-37

Cup holder 4-101

Curtain air bag 3-48

D

Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel illumination 4-41

Dashboard, see instrument cluster....4-40

Defogging (Windshield) 4-94

Defogging logic (Windshield)....4-96

Defroster (Rear window)....4-75

Defrosting (Windshield) 4-94

Dimensions 8-2

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination 4-41

Displays, see instrument cluster 4-40

Door locks....4-16

Central door lock switch 4-18

Child-protector rear door lock 4-19

Index

Drinks holders, see cup holders 4-101

Driver's 3-point seat belt....3-15

Driver's and passenger's front air bag....3-44

Driving at night....5-46

Driving in flooded areas....5-47

Driving in the rain 5-47

E

Economical operation....5-42

Electric chromic mirror 4-36

Electric power steering....4-34

Electronic stability control(ESC)....5-30

Emergency starting....6-4

Jump starting....6-5

Push starting....6-6

Emergency while driving....6-3

Emission control system....7-72

Crankcase emission control system 7-72

Evaporative emission control System....7-72

Exhaust emission control system....7-73

Engine 8-2

Engine compartment....2-4

Engine coolant 7-28

Engine number 8-8

Engine oil....7-26

Engine overheats....6-7

Engine start/stop button 5-8

Engine temperature gauge 4-42

Engine will not start....6-4

Evaporative emission control System 7-72

Exhaust emission control system....7-73

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7-22

Flat tire (with spare tire)....6-13

Changing tires 6-14

Compact spare tire 6-19

Removing and storing the spare tire 6-14

Floor mat anchor(s) 4-104

Fluid

Brakes/clutch fluid 7-31

Washer fluid 7-32

Folding the rear seat 3-10

Front passenger and rear seat belt 3-17

Front seat adjustment....3-4

Fuel filler lid 4-27

Fuel gauge....4-43

Fuel requirements 1-3

Fuses 7-54

Fuse/relay panel description....7-58

Instrument panel fuse....7-55

Memory fuse 7-56

G

Gauge

Engine temperature gauge....4-42

Fuel gauge....4-43

GAW (Gross axle weight) 5-57

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) 5-57

Glove box....4-98

GVW (Gross vehicle weight) 5-57

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) 5-57

H

Hazard warning flasher....4-64

Hazardous driving conditions....5-44

Headlamp escort 4-65

Headrest(front)....3-6

Headrest(rear) 3-12

Hight adjustment....3-16

Highway driving....5-48

Hill-start assist control....5-33

Hood 4-25

Horn 4-35

How to use this manual 1-2

|

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster 1-6

Indicators and warnings....4-50

Inside rearview mirror 4-36

Instrument cluster 4-40

Automatic transaxle shift position indicator....4-49

Engine temperature gauge....4-42

Fuel gauge....4-43

Instrument panel illumination....4-40

Manual transaxle shift indicator 4-47

Odometer 4-43

Outside temperature 4-48

Speedometer 4-41

Tachometer 4-41

Trip computer 4-44

Warning and indicators 4-50

Instrument panel fuse....7-55

Instrument panel illumination....4-41

Instrument panel overview 2-3

Interior care....7-71

Interior features....4-100

Ashtray 4-100

Cargo screen 4-105

Cigarette lighter 4-100

Clothes hanger....4-103

Cup holder 4-101

Floor mat anchor(s)....4-104

Luggage net 4-104

Index

Power outlet 4-102

Shopping bag holder 4-103

Sunvisor 4-101

Interior light 4-72

Interior overview 2-2

ISG (Idle stop and go) system....5-13

J

Jump starting....6-5

K

Key position....5-5

Keys 4-2

L

Label

Air bag warning label 3-56

Refrigerant label 8-8

Tire sidewall labeling....7-46

Tire specification and pressure label....8-8

Vehicle certification label....8-7

Lighting 4-65

Battery saver function....4-65

Headlamp escort 4-65

Lower anchor....3-29

Lubricants and capacities....8-4

Luggage box 4-99

Luggage net 4-104

M

Maintenance

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items....7-22

Maintenance services 7-4

Maintenance under severe usage conditions....7-21

Normal maintenance schedule 7-9

Owner maintenance....7-6

Scheduled maintenance service 7-8

Tire maintenance....7-46

Maintenance schedule....7-8

Maintenance under severe usage conditions....7-21

Normal maintenance schedule 7-9

Maintenance services....7-4

Manual climate control system....4-76

Air conditioning 4-81

Climate control air filter....4-84

Heating and air conditioning....4-77

Manual transaxle 5-17

Manual transaxle shift indicator....4-49

Memory fuse....7-56

Mirrors 4-36

Day/night rearview mirror 4-36

Electric chromic mirror 4-36

Inside rearview mirror 4-36

Outside rearview mirror 4-37

Multi box 4-99

0

Occupant detection system....3-38

Odometer 4-43

Oil (Engine) 7-26

Outside rearview mirror 4-37

Outside temperature....4-48

Overheats 6-7

Owner maintenance 7-6

P

Parking brake....5-26

Parking brake....7-33

Power brakes....5-25

Power outlet 4-102

Power window lock button 4-24

Pre-tensioner seat belt 3-19

Push starting....6-6

R

Rear seat....3-10

Rearview camera 4-63

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures 7-41

Recommended lubricants and capacities....8-4

Recommended SAE viscosity number....8-6

Refrigerant label 8-8

Remote keyless entry 4-6

Road warning....6-2

Rocking the vehicle 5-45

Roof antenna 4-109

Roof rack 4-107

S

Scheduled maintenance service....7-8

Maintenance under severe usage conditions....7-21

Normal maintenance schedule 7-9

Seat belt warning 3-15

Seat belts....3-14

Hight adjustment....3-16

Pre-tensioner seat belt....3-19

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system....3-15

Seat belt warning 3-15

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat....3-17

Seat warmer 3-8

Seatback pocket 3-10

Index

Seating capacity....5-52

Seats 3-2

Armrest(front) 3-9

Folding the rear seat....3-10

Front seat adjustment 3-4

Headrest(front) 3-6

Headrest(rear)....3-12

Rear seat....3-10

Seat warmer....3-8

Seatback pocket 3-9

Shopping bag holder....4-103

Side impact air bag....3-47

Smart key 4-9

Smooth cornering....5-46

Snow tires 5-49

Spare tire

Compact spare tire 6-19

Compact spare tire replacement....7-45

Removing and storing the spare tire 6-14

Special driving conditions 5-44

Driving at night....5-46

Driving in flooded areas....5-47

Driving in the rain....5-47

Hazardous driving conditions 5-44

Highway driving....5-48

Rocking the vehicle....5-45

Smooth cornering....5-46

Speedometer 4-41

Sports mode 5-22

SRS components and functions....3-36

Starting difficulties, see engine will not start....6-4

Steering wheel 4-34

Electric power steering....4-34

Horn 4-35

Tilt steering 4-35

Steering wheel audio control....4-110

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 5-53

Storage compartment 4-98

Center console storage 4-98

Glove box 4-98

Luggage box 4-99

Multi box....4-99

Sunroof 4-30

Sunvisor 4-101

T

Tachometer 4-41

Tailgate 4-20

Tether anchor system....3-28

Tilt steering....4-35

Tire and loading information label 5-52

Tire mobility kit....6-21

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)....6-8

Tire specification and pressure label 8-8

Tires and wheels....7-41, 8-3

Checking tire inflation pressure....7-42

Compact spare tire replacement....7-45

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures....7-41

Tire care....7-41

Tire maintenance....7-46

Tire replacement 7-45

Tire rotation....7-43

Tire sidewall labeling....7-46

Tire traction....7-46

Wheel alignment and tire balance....7-44

Wheel replacement....7-46

Towing 6-27

Towing capacity....5-53

Transaxle

Automatic transaxle 5-20

Manual transaxle 5-17

Trip computer 4-44

V

Vehicle break-in process....1-5

Vehicle capacity weight 5-52

Vehicle certification label 8-7

Vehicle curb weight 5-57

Vehicle handling instruncions 1-5

Vehicle identification number (VIN) 8-7

Vehicle load limit 5-52

Cargo capacity....5-53

Certification label 5-55

Seating capacity 5-52

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit....5-53

Tire and loading information label 5-52

Towing capacity 5-53

Vehicle capacity weight 5-52

Vehicle stability management....5-34

Vehicle weight 5-57

Base curb weight....5-57

Cargo weight 5-57

GAW (Gross axle weight) 5-57

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) 5-57

GVW (Gross vehicle weight) 5-57

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) 5-57

Vehicle curb weight 5-57

Volume/weight 8-3

Index

W

Warning and indicators....4-50

Washer fluid....7-32

Weight/volume 8-3

Wheel alignment and tire balance 7-44

Wheel replacement 7-46

Windows 4-22

Auto down window 4-24

Power window lock button 4-24

Windshield defrosting and defogging 4-94

Defogging logic....4-96

Winter driving....5-49

Snow tires....5-49

Wiper blades 7-35

Wipers and washers 4-69

Introduction

1

How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-3

Vehicle handling instructions / 1-5

Vehicle break-in process / 1-5

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-6

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimize the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle. By reading your manual, you will learn about features, important safety information, and driving tips under various road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual.

Sections: This manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.

You will find various types of safety instructions in this manual. These instructions were prepared to enhance your personal safety. Carefully read and follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these instructions.

⚠ WARNING - Injury or death

A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION - Possible vehicle damage

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.

NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having a pump octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.

Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified. (Consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.)

WARNING - Refueling

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off. Attempts to force more fuel into the tank can cause fuel overflow onto you and the ground causing a risk of fire.
  • Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

NOTICE

Tighten the cap until it clicks one time, otherwise the fuel cap open warning indicator Right will illuminate.

Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty if they result from the use of:

1. Gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. "E85" is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of "E85" may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's engine and fuel system. Kia recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 10 percent.

NOTICE

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance problems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.

Use of MTBE

Kia recommends avoiding fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle. Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle performance and produce vapor lock or hard starting.

NOTICE

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system.

Fuel Additives

Kia recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System. For more information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the website (www.top-tiergas.com)

For customers who do not use TOP Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, additives that you can buy separately may be added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive added to the fuel tank at every 7,500 miles or 12 months is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

VEHICLE HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover.

Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, track, etc.) give this vehicle a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles. It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as a conventional 2-wheel drive sedans or sports coupe. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure to read the “Reducing the risk of a rollover” driving guidelines, in section 5 of this manual.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS

No special break-in period is needed. By following a few simple precautions for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Door Ajar Warning Light

Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

Auto stop for ISG system indicator*

Seat Belt Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Tail light indicator*

High Beam Indicator

Malfunction Indicator

Active ECO indicator*

Turn Signal Indicator

Air Bag Warning Light

Electronic power steering (EPS) system warning light

Front Fog Light Indicator*

Low Tire Pressure Telltale*

Key out indicator*

ESC Indicator

Tailgate Open Warning Light

Fuel cap open warning indicator

ESC OFF Indicator

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Immobilizer indicator

ABS Warning Light*

Cruise Indicator*

Low windshield washer fluid level warning light

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light

Cruise SET Indicator*

* if equipped

* For more detailed explanations, refer to "Instrument cluster" in section 4.

Your vehicle at a glance

2

Interior overview / 2-2

Instrument panel overview / 2-3

Engine compartment / 2-4

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

Interior view of a car dashboard with numbered UI controls and a color picker interface

* The actual interior in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Door Lock/Unlock Button....4-17
2. Outside Rearview Mirror Control Switch* 4-38
3. Central Door Lock Switch*......4-18
4. Power Window Lock Button ^* .....4-24
5. Power Window Switches* ......4-22
6. Fuse Box....7-54
7. Instrument Panel Illumination Control Knob* 4-41
8. Idle Stop and Go (ISG) OFF button..5-13
9. ESC OFF Button....5-30
10. Hood Release Lever 4-25
11. Steering Wheel 4-34
12. Steering Wheel Tilt Lever* ......4-35
13. Seat....3-2
14. Fuel Filler Lid Release Lever*......4-27
15. Advanced Lighting Speaker* .....4-111
    * if equipped

OAM012001N

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

Diagram of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification and control functions

* The actual instrument panel in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Instrument Cluster....4-40
2. Light Control / Turn Signals.....4-65
3. Audio Controls* 4-110
4. Advanced Lighting Speaker*......4-111
5. Driver's Front Air Bag....3-44
6. Auto Cruise Controls*......5-37
7. Wiper/Washer....4-69
8. Vent Controls....4-79
9. Engine start/stop button*......5-8
10. Active ECO button* 5-41
11. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch....4-64, 6-2
12. Passenger air bag OFF indicator...3-38
13. Climate Control System.....4-76, 4-85
14. Shift Lever....5-17, 5-20
15. Brake Pedal
16. Accelerator Pedal
17. Parking Brake....5-26
18. Glove Box....4-98
19. Passenger's Front Air Bag ......3-44
    * if equipped

OAM012002

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

■ 1.6 Gasoline

Technical diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components for identification

■ 2.0 Gasoline

Technical diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components for identification

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration..

1. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir....7-32
2. Engine Oil Filler Cap....7-26
3. Engine Oil Dipstick....7-26
4. Engine Coolant Reservoir....7-28
5. Radiator Cap....7-29
6. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir .....7-31
7. Positive Battery Terminal....7-38
8. Negative Battery Terminal....7-38
9. Fuse Box....7-54
10. Air Cleaner 7-34
    * if equipped

OAM012003/OAM072100L

Seats / 3-2

Seat belts / 3-14

Child restraint system / 3-24

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-32

Safety features of your vehicle

SEATS

Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels indicating different parts of the seat or grip.

Front seat

(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height (Driver's seat)*
(4) Seat warmer*
(5) Headrest
(6) Armrest (Driver's seat)*

Rear seats

(7) Folding the seatback

(8) Headrest

* if equipped

WARNING - Loose objects

Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals.

WARNING - Uprighting seat

Do not press the release lever on a manual seatback without holding and controlling the seatback. The seatback will spring upright possibly impacting you or other passengers.

WARNING

- Driver responsibility for passengers

The driver must advise the passenger to keep the seatback in an upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion. If a seat is reclined during an accident, the occupant's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt, applying great force to the unprotected abdomen.

WARNING - Seat cushion

Occupants should never sit on seat cushions. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop.

WARNING - Driver's seat

• Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position of the seatback. Storing items against a seatback or in any other way interfering with proper locking of a seatback.
• Sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining comfortable control of your vehicle. A distance of at least 10" from your chest to the steering wheel is recommended. Failure to do so can result in airbag inflation injuries to the driver.

WARNING - Rear seatbacks

Always lock the rear seatback before driving. Failure to do so could result in passengers or objects being thrown forward injuring vehicle occupants.

WARNING - Seat adjustment

• Do not adjust the seat while wearing seat belts. Moving the seat forward will cause strong pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near the seat bottom or seat track while adjusting the seat. Your hand could get caught in the seat mechanism.

3D illustration of a car seat with highlighted seat positions and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Front seat adjustment - manual

Forward and rearward

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and rearward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

WARNING - Unexpected Seat Movement

After adjusting a manual seat, always check that it is locked by shifting your weight to the front and back. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

3D illustration of a car seat with highlighted side views showing motion paths (no text or symbols)

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

OAM039004OAM039003

Seat height (for driver's seat) (if equipped)

To change the height of the seat, push the lever upwards or downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push down the lever several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull up the lever several times.

Top-down diagram of a car showing internal compartments with two yellow arrows indicating specific areas (no text or symbols present)

Headrest

The driver's and front passenger's seats are equipped with a headrest for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes.

Also, adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible.

For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

WARNING - Headrest removal/adjustment

• Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed. Headrests can provide critical neck and head support in a crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion. Driver may lose control of the vehicle.

3D rendered image of a humanoid robot head with a yellow arrow pointing to the neck (no text or symbols on the object itself)

Forward and rearward adjustment The headrest may be adjusted forward to 4 different positions by pulling the headrest forward to the desired detent. To adjust the headrest to it's furthest rearward position, pull it fully forward to the farthest position and release it. Adjust the headrest so that it properly supports the head and neck.

Diagram showing a car seat with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or positioning.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

Diagram showing car seat positioning with numbered arrows indicating movement from top to side of seat, labeled 1 and 2.

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest, raise it as far as it can go then press the release button (1) while pulling the headrest up (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

Make sure the headrest locks in position after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.

Illustration of a person driving a car with yellow arrows indicating motion direction (no text or symbols)

HNF2041-1OAM039007OAM

Active headrest

The active headrest is designed to move forward and upward during a rear impact. This helps to prevent the driver's and front passenger's heads from moving backward and thus helps minimize neck injuries.

PRWD STOP OAM032010

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. While the engine is running, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

• Each time you push the button, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :

- The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.

With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

CAUTION - Seat damage

- When cleaning the seats, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat warmer, do not place anything on the seats that insulates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat covers on the seats while the seat warmer is in operation.

- Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers. Damage to the seat warming components could occur.

⚠ WARNING - Seat warmer burns

Passengers should use extreme caution when using seat warmers due to the possibility of excess heating or burns. The seat warmer may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. The occupants must be able to feel if the seat is becoming too warm and to turn the seat warmer off. The seat warmer may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. In particular, the driver must exercise extreme care for the following types of passengers:

1. Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients

2. Persons with sensitive skin or those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals (Continued)

(Continued)

1. Intoxicated individuals
2. Individuals taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.)

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a yellow directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Armrest (if equipped)

To use the armrest, swing down the armrest to the lowest position.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a document inside a car with a yellow arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

WARNING - Seatback pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pocket. An occupant could contact such objects in a crash. Heavy objects in the front passenger seatback could also interfere with the airbag sensing system.

Rear seat adjustment

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING - Folded down seatback

Never allow passengers sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use.

This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING - Objects

Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a dotted circular annotation highlighting a section (no visible text or symbols)

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the pocket (if equipped) between the rear seatback and cushion, and insert the rear seat belt webbing in the guide to prevent the seat belt from being damaged.

2. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.

3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest position.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and passenger seat, with an inset close-up highlighting a yellow button (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car showing the seat, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull on the seatback folding lever, then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle. When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat and dashboard area with a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols on the main subject)

1. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback backward by pulling on the folding lever. Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place.

2. Return the rear seat belt to the proper position.

When returning the rear seatbacks to the upright position, remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position.

⚠ WARNING - Rear seatback

When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden stop, the unlocked seatback could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter the passenger compartment.

WARNING - Cargo

Do not place heavy objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit vehicle occupants in a frontal collision.

Top-down diagram of a car showing internal seating arrangement with yellow directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

OPA039053

Headrest

The rear seat(s) is equipped with headrests in all the seating positions for the occupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height as the top of their eyes.

Also adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

WARNING - Headrest removal

Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed. Headrests can provide critical neck and head support in a crash.

1 3 2 OUN026043

OUN026043 OUN028044

N028044 1 2 3

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).

Removal and installation

To remove the headrest, raise it as far as it can go then press the release button (1) while pulling the headrest up (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pessing the release button (1). Then adjust it to the appropriate height and ensure that it locks in position.

SEAT BELTS

Seat belt restraint system

Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.

Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.

- For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always be used whenever the vehicle is moving. A properly positioned shoulder belt should be positioned midway over your shoulder across your collarbone.

- Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. See child restraint system section for further discussion.

⚠ WARNING - Shoulder belt

Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back. An improperly positioned shoulder belt cannot protect the occupant in a crash.

WARNING - Damaged seat belt

Replace the entire seat belt assembly if any part of the webbing or hardware is damage as you can no longer be sure that a damage seat belt will provide protection in a crash.

WARNING - Twisted seat belt

Make sure your seat belt is not twisted when worn. A twisted seat belt may not properly protect you in an accident and could even cut into your body.

⚠ WARNING - Seat belt buckle

Do not allow foreign material (gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to obstruct the seat belt buckle. This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.

1GQA2083

Seat belt warning (for driver's seat)

The driver's seat belt warning light and chime will activate to the following table when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.

Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt	Vehicle Speed	Light-Blink	Chime-Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled → Unbuckled	Below 5 km/h (3 mph)	6 seconds	None
	5 km/h~10 km/h	6 seconds
	Above 10 km/h (6 mph)	6 sec. on / 24 sec. off (11 times)
Unbuckled	Above 10 km/h (6 mph)↓Below 5 km/h (3 mph)	6 seconds *1↓Stop *2

* Warning pattern repeats 11 times with an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's seat belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.
*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.

1 2 B180A01NF-1

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking retractor To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position.

It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

If you are not able to smoothly pull enough of the seat belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Front seat 1 2 3 OUN026100

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety.

The height of the seat belt should not be too close to your neck. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder near the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

WARNING - Shoulder belt position

Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

WARNING - Seat belt replacement

Replace your seat belts after being in an accident. Failure to replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of another collision.

Illustration of a person wearing a seatbelt and belt, with a yellow arrow indicating a specific point (no text or symbols present)

You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly across your hips. If the lap belt is located too high on your waist, it may increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision.

The arm closest to the seat belt buckle should be over the belt while the other arm should be under the belt as shown in the illustration.

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with combination locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems. Although a combination retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, it is strongly recommended that children always be seated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type).

It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). Refer to "Using a child restraint system" in this section.

To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract.

Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with a highlighted circular detail (no text or symbols)

When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the "CENTER" mark must be used.

Close-up of hands adjusting a car seatbelt with a yellow arrow indicating the angle (no text or symbols present)

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the release button (1) in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

Interior view of a car showing two car seats with side lockers and a dotted circle highlighting the seat area (no text or symbols present)

OAM039047B210A01NF-1
Stowing the rear seat belt

The rear seat belt buckles can be stowed in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion when not in use.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a dotted circular annotation highlighting a section (no readable text or symbols)

Routing the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt guides will help keep the belts from being trapped behind or under the seats when they are folded down.

After inserting the seat belt, tighten the belt webbing by pulling it up.

CAUTION - Seat belt guide

Remove the seat belt from the guides before using. If you pull the seat belt when it is stored in the guides, it may damage the guides and/or belt webbing.

Interior view of a car showing a driver and passenger seatbelt, with no visible text or symbols

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose of the pretensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in crashes where the collision is severe enough.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body. If the system senses excessive seat belt tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the load limiter inside the seat belt retractor will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.

1 2 3 4 OAM032060N

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration:

1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. Anchor pre-tensioner assembly
4. SRS control module

Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioners will not be activated if the seat belts are not being worn at the time of the collision.

\*NOTICE

When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.

⚠ WARNING - Skin irritation

Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated. The fine dust from the pre-tensioner activation may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods.

• Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag warning light ( × on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position, and then it should turn off.
• If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, or if it remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, please have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag system as soon as possible.

NOTICE

Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner. Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized Kia dealer.

⚠ WARNING - Hot pretensioner

Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism fires during a collision the pretensioner becomes hot and can burn you.

Pre-tensioners are designed to operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. If the pre-tensioner must be replaced, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

Seat belt precautions

Infant or small child

You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country. Child and/or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. For more information about the use of these restraints, refer to "Child restraint system" in this section.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened and snugged on the hips and as low as possible. Check if the belt fits periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are given the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 12) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. Children age 12 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a child age 12 and under in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child's neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system.

⚠ WARNING - Small children

Do not allow small children to ride in the vehicle without an appropriate child restraint system. If the shoulder belt comes in contact with your child's neck or face your child is too small to ride in the vehicle. In a crash the seat belt will inflict injury to your child's neck, throat and face.

Restraint of pregnant women

Pregnant women should wear lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific recommendations by their doctors. The lap portion of the belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS POSSIBLE on the hips, not a cross the abdomen.

⚠ WARNING - Pregnant women

Pregnant women must never place the lap portion of the seat belt above or on the abdomen where the fetus is located. The force of the seat belt during a collision will crush the fetus.

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the vehicle is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front and rear seats are in a reclined position.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

⚠ WARNING - Pinched seat belt

Make sure that the webbing and/or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat when returning the rear seatback to its upright position. A caught or pinched webbing/buckle may become damaged and could fail during a collision or sudden stop.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized Kia dealer.

Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided.

You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the safety standards of your country.

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by seat belt, or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH anchors (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts, and fits your child.

Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

⚠ WARNING - Restraint location

Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat. A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating airbag.

⚠️ CAUTION - Hot child restraint

A child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. Be sure to check the seat cover, buckles and latches before placing a child in the restraint system.

When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the luggage area or fasten it with a seat belt so that it will not be thrown forward in case of a sudden stop or an accident.

⚠ WARNING - Holding children

Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the car's interior. Always use a child restraint system which is appropriate for your child's height and weight.

WARNING - Unattended Children

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. The car can heat up very quickly, resulting in injuries to the child in the vehicle.

⚠ WARNING - Seat belt use

Do not use one seat belt for two occupants at the same time. This will eliminate any safety benefit provided by the seat belt to the occupants.

Close-up of a car seatbelt system with visible straps and meshing (no text or symbols)

Forward-facing child restraint system OUN026150

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend that the child restraint system be used in the rear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency locking mode), you must manually change these seat belts to the automatic locking mode to secure a child restraint.

If the seat belt does not operate as described in this section, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Child seat installation

• Always follow the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Child restraint system manufacturers know their products best.

- Failure to observe this manual's instructions regarding child restraint system and the instructions provided with the child restraint system could result in the improper installation of the child restraint system which may reduce the protection to your child in a crash or a sudden stop.

Medical illustration of a car seat assembly with no visible text or symbols

Placing a passenger seat belt into the automatic locking mode The automatic locking mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the following procedure.

Illustration of a car seatbelt being adjusted for a person's seatbelt, showing yellow arrows indicating adjustment (no text or symbols)

Illustration of a hand using a tool to lift a seatbelt, showing the seatbelt being adjusted (no text or symbols present)

To install a child restraint system on the outboard or center rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system on the seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct "click" sound.

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

1. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the "Automatic Locking" (child restraint) mode.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being lifted by a hand (no text or symbols)

1. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible "clicking" or "ratcheting" sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode. If no distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

Illustration of a person using a seatbelt to adjust the seat (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
2. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.
3. Double check that the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode.

The lap/shoulder belt automatically returns to the "emergency lock mode" whenever the belt is allowed to retract fully.

Therefore, the preceding seven steps must be followed each time a child restraint is installed.

To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

WARNING - Auto lock mode

Set the retractor to Automatic Lock mode when installing any child restraint system. If the retractor is not in the Automatic Locking mode, the child restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops suddenly.

Interior view of a vehicle air conditioner unit with three circular vent indicators and a close-up inset showing a control panel (no text or symbols visible)

Securing a child restraint seat with tether anchor system

Child restraint hook holders are located on the back of the rear seat-backs.

Technical illustration of a car backseat with seatbelt and seat, no text or symbols present

1. Route the child restraint seat tether strap over the seatback. For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the child restraint seat.

WARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one child restraint to a single tether anchor or to a single lower anchorage point. The increased load caused by multiple seats may cause the tethers or lower anchorage points to break.

Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Incorrectly fitted child restraints may swing, twist, tip or separate causing death or serious injury.

Top-down line drawing of a car showing front, rear, side, and top views (no text or symbols)

Securing a child restraint seat with child seat lower anchor system

Some child seat manufacturers make child restraint seats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH-compatible child restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children". These seats include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two LATCH anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats.

Lower Anchor Position Indicator Lower Anchor OUN038139L

Child restraint symbols are located on the left and right rear seat backs to indicate the position of the lower anchors for child restraints.

⚠ WARNING - Unused rear seatbelts

Always fasten the seatbelts behind the child restraint seat when they are not used to secure the child seat. Failure to do so may result in child strangulation.

Close-up of a wrist with two circular annotations highlighting specific points of interest, inset shows mechanical components (no text or symbols)

LATCH anchors have been provided in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There is no LATCH anchor provided for the center rear seating position.

The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions. When you install your child's restraint system using the LATCH anchors buckle the shoulder lap belt, then lock the retractor and pull the belt to remove the slack in the belt so it lies flat against the vehicle seat.

Follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions to properly install child restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH child restraint, assure that the seat is properly attached to the LATCH and tether anchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat before you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place.

⚠ WARNING - LATCH lower anchors

Never attempt to attach a LATCH equipped seat in the center seating position. LATCH lower anchors are only to be used with the left and right rear outboard seating positions. You may damage the anchors or the anchors may fail and break in a collision.

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. OAM032026

(1) Driver's front air bag
(2) Passenger's front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag
(4) Curtain air bag

Even in vehicles with air bags, you and your passengers must always wear the safety belts provided in order to minimize the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision or rollover.

How does the air bag system operate

• Air bag are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START the appropriate position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of a serious frontal collision or side collision (if equipped with side impact air bag or curtain air bag) in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.
- There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to inflate by the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors send out an electronic deployment/inflation signal.
- Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision. Though, factors are not limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant.
  It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a severe collision, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of the extremely short time in which a collision occurs and the need to get the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part of air bag design.
  However, air bag inflation can also cause injuries which normally can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones, and sometimes more severe injuries because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

- There are even circumstances under which contact with the air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the air bag.

WARNING - Airbag inflation

Sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining comfortable control of your vehicle. A distance of at least 10" from your chest to the steering wheel is recommended. Failure to do so can result in airbag inflation injuries to the driver.

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and they leave smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. Open your doors and/or windows as soon as possible after impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder.

Though smoke and powder are non-toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and consult a doctor if the symptom persists.

⚠ WARNING - Hot components

Do not touch the air bag storage area's internal components immediately after airbag inflation. The air bag related parts in the steering wheel, instrument panel and the roof rails above the front and rear doors are very hot. Hot components can result in burn injuries.

AIRBAG 1JBH3051

Installing a child restraint on a front passenger's seat is forbidden

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger's seat. If the air bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger's seat either. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

⚠ WARNING - Air bag deployment

When children are seated in the rear outboard seats of a vehicle equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, install the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible. Inflation of the side and/or curtain air bags could impact the child.

Silhouette of two figures in dynamic motion, one running and the other holding a bat (no text or symbols)

W7-147

Air bag warning light

The purpose of the air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the warning light should illuminate for approximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer if:

• The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON.
  • The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition switch is in ON position.

8 10 2 7 14 3 11 9 5,13 4 12 8 6 1 14 3 9 5,13 4 OAM032160N

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors

10. PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator (Front passenger's seat only)

11. Occupant detection system (Front passenger's seat only)
12. Driver's and front passenger's seat belt buckle sensors
13. Anchor pretensioner assembly
14. Side pressure sensor

The SRSCM continually monitors all SRS components while the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, after which the SRS air bag warning light should go out.

If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the SRS. Have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible.

• The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.
- The light blinks when the ignition switch is in ON position.

3D rendering of a driver's front air bag (1) inside a car seat, showing body positioning and seat placement (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

The front air bag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

Driver's front air bag (2) and driver's front air bag (3) shown in a car seat with a person seated, no text or symbols on the diagram itself.

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the air bags.

3D rendered illustration of a person inside a car seatbelt, no text or symbols present

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

Passenger's front air bag

3D rendered illustration of a person in a car climbing a slope, no text or symbols present

WARNING

- Air bag obstructions

Do not install or place any accessories on the steering wheel, instrument panel, or on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the air bag deploys.

\*NOTICE

Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the ignition switch. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS air bag warning light to illuminate.

■Type A PASSENGER AIR BAS OAM032071N ■Type B PASSENGER AIR BAS OAM032072N

Occupant detection system

Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat.

The occupant detection system is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. The driver's front air bag is not affected or controlled by the occupant detection system.

Main components of occupant detection system

• A detection device located within the front passenger seat track.
  • Electronic system to determine whether passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.
• A warning light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warning light is interconnected with the occupant detection system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system determines to be of adult size, and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator will turn off and the front passenger's air bag will be able to inflate, if necessary, in frontal crashes.

You will find the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator on the center facia panel. This system detects the conditions 1\~4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly (sitting upright with the seat in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and wearing the safety belt properly) for the most effective protection by the air bag and the safety belt.

- The ODS (Occupant Detection System) may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can affect the detection system. These include:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or resting them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system

Condition detected by the occu-pant detection system	Indicator/Warning light		Devices
	PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator light	SRS warning light	Front passenger air bag
1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2	Off	Off	Activated
2. Infant or child restraint system with 12 months old*3 *4	On	Off	Deactivated
3. Unoccupied	On	Off	Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system	Off	On	Activated

*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child than the same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.

*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is a normal condition.

WARNING - ODS system

Riding in an improper position adversely affects the occupant detection system (ODS) and may result in the deactivation of front passenger airbag. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger as to the proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.

Do not hang onto the front passenger seat. Do not hang any items such as seatback table on the front passenger seatback.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Illustration of a car seat with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or labels on the diagram itself)

• Never put a heavy load in the front passenger seat.

3D rendered human figure seated in a car seat with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the figure itself)

• Never sit with the hips shifted towards the front of the seat.

3D illustration of a person seated in a car with a steering wheel, no text or symbols present

• Never place the feet on the dashboard.

3D illustration of a person seated in a car with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

• Never place the feet on the front passenger seatback.

3D rendered human figure seated in a car seat with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the figure itself)

• Never excessively recline the front passenger seatback.

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat with a yellow prohibition symbol (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

• Never lean on the door or center console.
• Never sit on one side of the front passenger seat.

Proper position B990A010

When an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, if the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is on, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.

WARNING - "AIR BAG OFF" light

Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a crash. The driver must instruct the passenger to reposition himself in the seat. Failure to properly position yourself may lead to airbag deactivation resulting in airbag non-deployment and in a collision. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator remains illuminated after the passenger repositions themselves properly and the car is restarted, it is recommended that passenger move to the rear seat because the passenger's front air bag will not deploy.

NOTICE

The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or after the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds.

Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat. Children too large for child restraints should use the available lap/shoulder belts. No matter what type of crash, children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.

\*NOTICE

Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place anything on or attach anything such as a blanket, front seat covers or after market seat heater to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant detection system.

If the occupant detection system is not working properly, the SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate because the passenger's front air bag is connected with the occupant detection system. If there is a malfunction of the occupant detection system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator will not illuminate and the passenger's front air bag will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if there is no occupant in the front passenger's seat.

Driver's front air bag OAM039027 Passenger's front air bag AIREAG OAM039028

Driver's and passenger's front air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating position.

The indications of the system's presence are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on the air bag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driver's and front passenger's seat belt usage and impact severity.

The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger's seat belts are fastened.

These sensors provide the ability to control the SRS deployment based on whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation within two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts.

The passenger's front air bag is designed to help reduce the injury of children sitting close to the instrument panel in low speed collisions. However, children are safer if they are restraint in the rear seat.

According to the impact severity and seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS Control Module) controls the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Additionally, your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger's seat. The occupant detection system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger's seat and will turn off the front passenger's air bag under certain conditions. For more detail, see "Occupant detection system" in this section.

Manufacturers are required by government regulations to provide a contact point concerning modifications to the vehicle for persons with disabilities, which modifications may affect the vehicle's advanced air bag system. However, Kia does not endorse nor will it support any changes to any part or structure of the vehicle that could affect the advanced air bag system, including the occupant detection system.

WARNING

- Replacement/Modifications

The front passenger seat, dashboard or door should not be replaced except by an authorized Kia dealer using original Kia parts designed for this vehicle and model. Any other such replacement or modification could adversely affect the operation of the occupant detection system and your advanced air bags.

Advanced air bags are combined with pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. Front air bags are not intended to deploy in collisions in which sufficient protection can be provided by the pre-tensioner seat belt.

WARNING - SRS Wiring

Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

Front air bags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front air bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold.

Rear impact Side impact 2019 OEP036096N OVQ036018N Rollover 1VQA2091

Medical illustration showing a car interior with a highlighted knee joint (no text or symbols present)

Side impact air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a side impact air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side impact air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

WARNING - Unexpected deployment

Avoid impact to the side impact airbag sensor when the ignition switch is ON to prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact air bag.

The side impact air bag is supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in operation.

For best protection from the side air bag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side air bag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened.

The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps.

WARNING - Deployment Do not install any accessories including seat covers, on the side or near the side impact air bag as this may affect the deployment of the side air bags.

If seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. Inform that your vehicle is equipped with side impact air bags and an occupant detection system.

⚠ WARNING - Flying objects

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles if the side airbag inflates.

Interior view of a car showing driver's seat and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Curtain air bag

Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in most rollover situations.

Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side impact and/or curtain air bags.

NOTICE

Never try to open or repair any components of the side curtain air bag system. This should only be done by an authorized Kia dealer.

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)

There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection.

These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts. In other words, just because your vehicle is damaged and even if it is totally unusable, don't be surprised that the air bags did not inflate.

Diagram of a car with numbered parts labeled 1 through 8, likely indicating engine or component identification.

Close-up of a car interior showing a hand mixer and a highlighted rectangular component (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a car's front grille and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of a car's side profile showing the wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted section (no visible text or symbols)

OAM032030N/OAM039031/OAM032032/OAM039033/OAM032076N

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensors

(3) Side impact sensors
(4) Side pressure sensor

⚠ WARNING - Air bag sensors

- Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air bag deployment, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

- If the installation location or angle of the sensors is altered in any way, the air bags may deploy when they should not or they may not deploy when they should.

Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

- Problems may arise if the sensor installation angles are changed due to the deformation of the front bumper, body or B pillars or front door where side collision sensors are installed. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

- Installing aftermarket bumper guards or replacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adversely affect your vehicle's collision and air bag deployment performance.

Illustration of a car accident with a person inside the dashboard and a vehicle collision (no text or symbols)

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision.

Two grayscale illustrations of cars inside the dashboard, showing front and side views with no visible text or symbols.

Side impact and/or curtain air bags (if equipped)

Side impact and/or curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength, speed or angles of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

Although the front air bags (driver's and front passenger's air bags) are designed to inflate in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient frontal force in another type of impact. Side impact and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions. They may inflate in other type of collisions where a side force is detected by the sensors.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

Diagram showing a car with a driver inside the dashboard and a warning sign, likely indicating a hazard or accident scenario.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

- In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.

Illustration of a car crash with two cars and a driver inside, no text or symbols present

• Air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.

Illustration of two cars with a starburst effect, no visible text or symbols

• Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move to the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

Top-down illustration of a car collision with a starburst effect (no text or symbols)

• In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

Side view of a car with a truck and impact symbol, no visible text or symbols on the vehicle or background

3D rendered mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

- Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to "ride" under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "under-ride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such "under-ride" collisions.

- Airbags does not inflate in most rollover accidents, even though the vehicle is equipped with side impact air bags and curtain air bags.

Exterior view of a modern car parked near a vertical pole with a star emblem (no visible text or symbols)

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel must be performed by an authorized Kia dealer. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.

⚠ WARNING - Tampering with SRS

Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in the accidental inflation of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. An authorized Kia dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.

Safety features of your vehicle

Interior view of a car showing front and rear views with labeled OAM models (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels, some required by the Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS), are attached to the sunvisor to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

Keys / 4-2

Remote keyless entry / 4-6

Smart key / 4-9

Door locks / 4-16

Tailgate / 4-20

Windows / 4-22

Hood / 4-25

Features of your vehicle

4

Steering wheel / 4-34

Mirrors / 4-36

Instrument cluster / 4-40

Rearview camera / 4-63

Hazard warning flasher / 4-64

Lighting / 4-65

Wipers and washers / 4-69

Interior light / 4-72

Defroster / 4-75

Manual climate control system / 4-76

Automatic climate control system / 4-85

Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-94

Storage compartment / 4-98

Interior features / 4-100

Exterior feature / 4-107

Audio system / 4-109

KEYS

Close-up of a keychain with a barcode tag attached, shown in an inset image (no text or symbols on the main subject)

Record your key number

The key code number is stamped on the bar code tag attached to the key set. Should you lose your keys, this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the bar code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the code number and keep it in a safe place (not in the vehicle).

Close-up of a Type A key with metallic handle and key (no text or symbols on the key itself)

■ Type B OAM041096L

Key operations

• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.

Type B

To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold automatically.

To fold the key, fold the key manually while pressing the release button.

CAUTION - Folding key

Do not fold the key without pressing the release button. This may damage the key.

WARNING - Aftermarket keys

Use only Kia original parts for the ignition key in your vehicle. If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to operate causing possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.

Immobilizer system

Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, whenever you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks and determines and verifies that the ignition key is valid.

If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer system:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

Your Immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle.

NOTICE

Keep each key separately in order to avoid a starting malfunction.

Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch.

Metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal and may prevent the engine from being started.

If you need additional keys or lose your keys, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Immobilizer damage

Do not expose your immobilizer system to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. This may damage your immobilizer.

CAUTION - Immobilizer alterations

Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Limp home (override) procedure

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, if the immobilizer indicator ( )ones off after blink-

ing 5 times, your transponder equipped in the ignition key is out of order. You cannot start the engine without the limp home procedure. To start the engine, you have to input your password by using the ignition switch. Your password is only available from an authorized Kia dealership. Contact an authorized dealer for more information.

The following procedure is how to input your password of "2345" as an example.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The immobilizer indicator ( ) will blink 5 times and go off indicating the beginning of the limp home procedure.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position.

3. To enter the first digit (in this example "2"), turn the ignition switch to the ON and ACC position twice. Perform the same procedure for the next digits between 3 seconds and 10 seconds (for example, for "3", turn the ignition ON and ACC 3 times).

4. If all of the digits have been input successfully, you have to start the engine within 30 seconds. If you attempt to start the engine after 30 seconds, the engine will not start and you will have to input your password again.

After performing the limp home procedure, you have to see an authorized Kia dealer immediately to inspect and repair your ignition key or immobilizer system.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

OAM041097L

Remote keyless entry system operations

Lock (1)

1. Close all doors, engine hood and tailgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. All doors and tailgate will lock. The hazard warning lights will blink once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds, the hazard warning lights will blink and the horn will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked by checking the door lock button inside or pulling the outside door handle.

Unlock (2)

1. Press the unlock button(2).
2. The driver's door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) once more within 4 seconds.
4. All doors and tailgate will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

You can change the system to unlock all doors by one pressing the unlock button(Central Door Unlock Mode). Unlock mode can be switched between Two Stage Unlock Mode and Central Door Unlock Mode as follows:

Press the lock button(1) and unlock button(2) at the same time for 5 seconds or more. The hazard warning lights will blink four times.

Alarm (3, if equipped)

The horn sounds and the hazard warning lights blink for about 30 seconds if this button is pressed for more than 2 seconds. To stop the horn and lights, press any button on the transmitter.

NOTICE

If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.

Transmitter precautions

The transmitter will not work if any of the following occurs:

• The ignition key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.
  • The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work properly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

\*NOTICE

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.

Exploded view diagram of a mobile phone showing internal components and casing (no text or symbols)

Battery replacement

A transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery which will normally last for several years. When replacement is necessary, use the following procedure.

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery positive “+” symbol faces up as indicated in the illustration.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

For transmitter replacement, see an authorized Kia dealer to reprogram the transmitter.

The keyless entry system transmitter is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

To avoid damaging the transmitter, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION - Transmitter damage

Do not drop, wet or expose the keyless entry system transmitter to heat or sunlight.

SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)

① ② ③ ④

Smart key function

1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Tailgate unlock
   4.Panic (if equipped)

Illustration of a yellow object on a curved surface, possibly a vehicle or abstract shape (no text or symbols)

OMD040008OAM0

Locking

Using the door handle button

1. Close all doors, engine hood and tailgate.
2. Press the button of the outside door handle.
3. All doors and tailgate will lock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once.

4. Make sure that doors are locked by checking the door lock button inside the vehicle or pulling the outside door handle.

5. The button will only operate when the smart key is within 0.7\~1m (28\~40in.) from the outside door handle.
   • Even though you press the outside door handle button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for 3 seconds if any of following occur:

6. The smart key is in the vehicle.

7. The engine start/stop button is in 40230 ACC or ON position.
8. Any door except the tailgate is open.

Using the button on the smart key

1 Close all doors, engine hood and tailgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. All doors and tailgate will lock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked by checking the door lock button inside or pulling the outside door handle.

Unlocking

Using the door handle

1. Press the button of the driver's outside door handle.
2. The driver's door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the button once more within 4 seconds.
4. All doors and tailgate will unlock and the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.

*If you press the button of the front passenger's outside door handle while carrying the smart key, all doors will unlock.

• When the smart key is recognized in the area of 0.7\~1m (28\~40in.) from the front outside door handle, other people can also open the doors.
• After unlocking the driver's door or all doors, the door(s) will lock automatically unless the door is opened.

Using the button on the smart key

1. Press the unlock button (2) of the smart key.
2. The driver's door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the unlock button (2) once more within 4 seconds.
4. All doors and tailgate will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound two times.

After pressing the button, the doors will lock automatically unless any door or tailgate is opened within 30 seconds.

You can change the system to unlock all doors by one pressing the unlock button(Central Door Unlock Mode). Unlock mode can be switched between Two Stage Unlock Mode and Central Door Unlock Mode as follows:

Press the lock button(1) and unlock button(2) at the same time for 5 seconds or more. The hazard warning lights will blink four times.

Tailgate unlocking

Using the tailgate handle button

1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the tailgate handle button.
3. When all doors are locked, the hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Using the button on the smart key

1. Press the tailgate unlock button(3) for more than 1 second.
2. When all doors are locked, the hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Panic

1. Press the panic button(4) for more than 0.5 second.
2. The horn sounds and hazard warning light flash for about 30 seconds.

To stop the horn and lights, press any button on the smart key.

Start-up

You can start the engine without inserting the key. For detailed information refer to the "Engine start/stop button" in section 5.

Loss of the smart key

A maximum of 2 smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle.

If you happen to lose your smart key, you will not be able to start the engine. You should immediately take the vehicle and remaining key to your authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehicle, if necessary) to protect it from potential theft.

Smart key precautions

• The smart key will not work if any of the following occur:
• The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the smart key.
• The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.
• Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.
• When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key and contact an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Smart key

Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid as it can become damaged and not function properly. If the smart key is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warranty.

1 2 OEN040002K

Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation

If the smart key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key.

1. Press and hold the release button (1) and remove the mechanical key (2).

2. Insert the key into the hole of the outside door handle. Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to lock and toward the front of the vehicle to unlock.

3. To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

Smart key immobilizer system

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use.

Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the smart key and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobilizer system, whenever you turn the engine start/stop button to the ON position by pressing the button while carrying the smart key, it checks and determines and verifies if the smart key is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer system:

Turn the engine start/stop button to the ON position by pressing the button while carrying the smart key.

To activate the immobilizer system:

Turn the engine start/stop button to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid smart key for your vehicle, the engine will not start.

NOTICE

When starting the engine, do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around. Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts. Keep each key separate in order to avoid a starting malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not put metal accessories near the smart key.

The engine may not start because the metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal from transmitting normally.

If you need additional keys or lose your keys, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Two views of a smart car's open lid and casing, showing internal components and a yellow arrow indicating a location (no text or symbols)

Battery replacement

A smart key battery should last for several years, but if the smart key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one. If you are unsure how to use your smart key or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart key.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery positive “+” symbol faces down as indicated in the illustration.

3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

The smart key is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

Using the wrong battery can cause the smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

If you suspect that your smart key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your smart key is not working correctly, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

CAUTION - Smart key damage

Do not drop, wet or expose the smart key to heat or sunlight.

DOOR LOCKS

Type A Unlock Lock OAM049003

■ Type B OCM040007

Operating door locks from outside the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to unlock and toward the rear of the vehicle to lock.

• If you lock the driver's door with a key, all vehicle doors will lock automatically.

• From the driver's door, turn the key to the left once to unlock the door and once more within 4 seconds to unlock all doors.

• Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure the doors are closed securely.

\*NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
- If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

Diagram of a car's front and side views with numbered annotations indicating directional changes in the dashboard panel.

• To lock a door without the key, push the inside door lock button (1) or central door lock switch (2) to the "Lock" position and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors will lock automatically.

Always remove the ignition key, firmly engage the parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

1 2 3 Unlock Lock OAM049005

Operating door locks from inside the vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Unlock" position. The red mark (2) on the button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Lock" position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.
  • To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the driver's or front passenger's door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button will unlock and the door will open.

• Front doors cannot be locked if the ignition key is in the ignition switch and any front door is opened.

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following techniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the key to unlock the door from outside.
• Move to the cargo area and open the tailgate.

Passenger's doorDriver's 1 2 1 2 OAM049006/OAM042007N

With central door lock switch

Operate by pressing the central door lock switch.

• When pressing the front portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.
• When pressing the rear portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch and any front door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the front portion (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

WARNING - Doors

The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door.

WARNING - Unattended children/animals

Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle.

Door lock/unlock features

Impact sensing door unlock sys- tem

All doors will be automatically unlocked when the impact is delivered to impact sensors while the ignition switch is ON.

However, the doors may not be unlocked if mechanical problems occur with the door lock system or battery.

Speed sensing door lock system (if equipped)

All doors will automatically lock after the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h (9.3 MPH).

Shift lever door lock/unlock system (if equipped)

All doors will automatically unlock when the shift lever is moved into P (Park).

1 2 3 OAM049008

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock located on the rear edge of the door to the lock (position. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open even when the inner door handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle (1).

Even though the doors may be unlocked, the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle (2) until the rear door child safety lock is unlocked.

WARNING - Rear door locks

Use the rear door safety locks whenever children are in the vehicle. If a child accidentally opens the rear doors while the vehicle is motion, he can fall out.

TAILGATE

Exterior view of a silver car showing front and side door components with yellow directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked when all doors are locked or unlocked with the key or central door lock switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened by pressing the handle switch and then pulling the handle up.

The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.

CAUTION - Tailgate lift cylinders

Make certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and push down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that the tailgate is securely latched.

WARNING - Exhaust fumes

Driving with the tailgate open is not advisable. Dangerous exhaust fumes can enter the passenger compartment.

If you must drive with the tail-gate opened, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air can enter.

Make sure your hands, feet and other parts of your body are safely out of the way before closing the tail-gate.

CAUTION - Closing tailgate

Make sure nothing is near the tailgate latch and striker while closing the tailgate. It may damage the tailgate's latch.

WARNING - Riding in cargo area

Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. Occupants should always be properly restrained.

Close-up of a robotic arm with internal components, showing external assembly and close-up views (no text or symbols)

Emergency tailgate safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment, the tailgate can be opened by pushing the release lever and pushing open the tailgate.

WINDOWS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OAM042011N

(1) Driver's door power window switch
(2) Front passenger's door power window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window down (Driver's window)
(7) Power window lock switch

Power windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to operate.

Each door has a power window switch that controls the door's window. The driver has a power window lock button which can block the operation of passenger windows. The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the front doors are opened, the power windows cannot be operated even within the 30 second period.

In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

\*NOTICE

While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) in an open (or partially open) position, your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening.

5 5 OAM049013

Window opening and closing

The driver's door has a master power window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle.

To open or close a window, press down or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).

5 AUTO DOWN 5 6

Auto down window (Driver's window)

Pressing the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the driver's window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, momentarily pull the switch in the direction opposite of the window's movement.

Close-up of a car's front panel with a yellow arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols visible)

Power window lock button

• The driver can disable the power window switches on the passenger doors by pressing the power window lock button located on the driver's door to the LOCK position (pressed).
• When the power window lock button is in the LOCK position (pressed), the driver's master control cannot operate the passenger door power windows.

CAUTION - Opening/ Closing window

To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

OAM049014OAM042012

WARNING - Power windows

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver's door power window lock button in the LOCK position (pressed).

Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.

HOOD

Close-up of a car door handle with a yellow warning symbol on the side (no text or symbols on the object itself)

Opening the hood

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

Open the hood after turning off the engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift lever to the P(Park) position for automatic transaxle and to the 1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) for manual transaxle, and setting the parking brake.

Close-up of a car's front grille with labeled components (① and ②), showing internal wiring and a yellow connector (no text or symbols beyond labels)

1. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, pull the secondary latch inside of the hood center and lift the hood.

Medical imaging of a car body with highlighted anatomical features (no text or symbols)

1. Pull out the support rod from the hood.
   4.Hold the hood open with the support rod.

WARNING - Hot parts

Grasp the support rod in the area wrapped in rubber. The rubber will help prevent you from being burned by hot metal when the engine is hot.

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the following:

2. All filler caps in the engine compartment must be correctly installed.

3. Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed from the engine compartment.

4. Return the support rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling.

5. Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm (1 ft.) above the closed position and let it drop. Make sure that it locks into place.

WARNING - Fire risk

Do not leave gloves, rags or any other combustible material in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire.

⚠ WARNING - Unsecured engine hood

Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If the engine hood is not secured properly, it is likely to fly up blocking your vision and causing a crash.

The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole provided whenever you inspect the engine compartment. This will prevent the hood from falling and possibly injuring you.

FUEL FILLER DOOR

Close-up of a car fuel pump button with a yellow arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols on the button itself)

Opening the fuel filler door

The fuel filler door must be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuel filler door opener lever.

If the fuel filler door does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the door to break the ice and release the door. Do not pry on the door. If necessary, spray around the door with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

Diagram of a car's internal components showing two connected parts with directional arrows, no readable text or symbols present.

1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler door, pull the fuel filler door opener up.
3. Pull open the fuel filler door (1).
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel filler cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until it "clicks". This indicates that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it in lightly making sure that it is securely closed.

WARNING - Refueling

Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap. If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and subject you to the risk of fire and burns.

NOTICE

Tighten the cap until it clicks one time, otherwise the fuel cap open warning indicator that will illuminate.

Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.

WARNING - Fire/explosion risk

Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station facility. Failure to follow all warnings will result in severe personal injury, severe burns or death due to fire or explosion.

⚠ WARNING - Static electricity

• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling since you can generate static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in rapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.

NOTICE

When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete. Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.

WARNING - Cell phone fires

Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

CAUTION - Exterior paint

Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.

WARNING - Refueling& Vehicle fires

When refueling, always shut the engine off. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are securely closed, before starting the engine.

WARNING - Smoking

DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refueling. Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in fire.

Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel requirements" suggested in section 1.

If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine Kia cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

Interior view of a car air vent with door and control panel (no text or symbols visible)

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

CAUTION - Sunroof control lever

Do not continue to move the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

The sunroof cannot slide when it is in the tilt position nor can it be tilted while in an open or slide position.

Top-down view of a car interior showing the door, vent, and side panel with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Sliding the sunroof

To open or close the sunroof (manual slide feature), pull or push the sunroof control lever backward or forward to the first detent position.

Pulling the control lever downward also closes the sunroof.

To open the sunroof automatically:

Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the second detent position and then release it.

The sunroof will slide open automatically but will not open all the way. If you would like to completely open the sunroof, pull the lever once more.

However, the second time the lever is pulled, the sunroof will open only while the lever is pulled.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

To close the sunroof automatically:

Push the sunroof control lever forward to the second detent position and then release it. The sunroof will automatically close all the way.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

Illustration of a transparent smartphone with a cartoon teddy bear and a yellow arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the device itself)

Close-up of a car's side panel showing a highlighted button with yellow arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Automatic reversal

If an object is detected while the sun-roof is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop.

The auto reverse function does not work if a small obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

Tilting the sunroof

To open the sunroof (autotilt feature), push the sunroof control lever upward to the second detent. The sunroof will tilt all the way open. To stop the sunroof tilting at any point, operate the control lever.

To close the sunroof, pull the sunroof lever downward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

⚠ WARNING - Sunroof operation

When closing the sunroof, make sure there are no body parts in the movement range of the sliding roof. Parts of the body could become trapped or crushed.

Do not extend the face, neck, arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.

Periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the guide rail. The sunroof is made to slide together with the sunshade. Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is opened.

While using sunroof for a long time, a dust between sunroof and roof panel can make a noise. Open the sunroof and remove regularly the dust using clean cloth.

CAUTION - Sunroof motor damage

If you try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the glass or the motor could be damaged.

3D rendered object with cloud-like background and directional arrows, no visible text or symbols

Sunshade

When opening the sunroof, the sunshade will also open. Once the sunroof is closed, the sunshade can be manually closed.

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, you must reset your sunroof system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. According to the position of the sunroof, do the following.

1) In case the sunroof is closed completely or tilted:

Push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof tilts completely upward.

2) In case the sunroof is open: Push the sunroof control lever forward until the sunroof closes completely. Push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof tilts completely upward.

1. Release the sunroof control lever.

2. Push the sunroof control lever upward (for about 10 seconds) until the sunroof has returned to the original tilt position after it is raised a little higher than the maximum tilt position. Then, release the lever.

3. Push the sunroof control lever upward (for about 6 seconds) until the sunroof operates as follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN → SLIDE CLOSED

Then release the lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof system has been reset.

STEERING WHEEL

Electric power steering (EPS)

The power steering uses a motor to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort.

The motor driven power steering is controlled by a power steering control unit which senses the steering wheel torque and vehicle speed to command the motor.

The steering becomes heavier as the vehicle's speed increases and becomes lighter as the vehicle's speed decreases for optimum steering control.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

NOTICE

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort is high immediately after turning the ignition switch on. This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics is completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.

- A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the ignition switch is turned to the ON or LOCK position.

- Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

- The steering effort increases if the steering wheel is rotated continuously when the vehicle is not in motion. However, after a few minutes, it will return to its normal conditions.

- When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise could occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.

(Continued)

(Continued)

- When the vehicle is stationary, if you turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right continuously, the steering wheel becomes heavier from the end. But this is for your safety, not system malfunction. As time passes, the steering wheel return to its normal condition.

If the Electric Power Steering System does not operate normally, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to control or operate abnormally. Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Tilt steering

Tilt steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise the steering wheel to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive, while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.

WARNING - Steering wheel adjustment

Never adjust the angle and height of the steering wheel while driving. You may lose steering control.

① (if equipped) ② OAM049021L

To change the steering wheel angle, pull down the lock-release lever (1), adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2), then pull up the lock-release lever to lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driving.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a yellow directional arrow on the steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel. Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly.

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

MIRRORS

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror so that the center view through the rear window is seen. Make this adjustment before you start driving.

Do not place objects in the rear seat or cargo area which would interfere with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING - Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust the rearview mirror while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control.

Night Day OAM049023

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) (if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions. The sensor mounted in the mirror senses the light level around the vehicle, and automatically controls the headlight glare from the vehicles behind you.

When the engine is running, the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror.

Whenever the shift lever is shifted into reverse (R), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in order to improve the drivers view behind the vehicle.

CAUTION - Cleaning mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. It may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Rear view display (if equipped) Indicator Sensor OAM042025N

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off.

Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust the mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street.

• The right outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

CAUTION - Rearview mirror

Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should restrict the movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with warm water.

WARNING - Mirror adjustment

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control.

Close-up of a car's side mirror and window, showing yellow directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)

Remote control
Manual type (if equipped)
To adjust an outside mirror, move the control lever.

Close-up of a car dashboard with a yellow directional arrow and control buttons (no text or symbols visible)

OAM049027B510A0

Electric type (if equipped)

The electric remote control mirror switch allows you to adjust the position of the left and right outside rearview mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror the ignition switch should be in the ACC or ON position. Push the switch (1) to R or L to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.

After the adjustment, put the switch into the neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

CAUTION - Outside mirror

- The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is depressed. Do not depress the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand. Doing so may damage the parts.

Features of your vehicle

Close-up of a car's side mirror highlighting a yellow curved component (no text or symbols visible)

Folding the outside rearview mirror

To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

■Type A 100 120 80 140 60 80 40 160 20 180 -120 200 -130 km/h mph CRUISE SET ECO 220 5 F E ABS H- KEY C 4 TRIP RANGE/TAVG. 8888 888° ODO 888888 ml

1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Engine temperature gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. Trip computer*
7. Fuel gauge
   * if equipped

■Type B 100 120 80 140 60 80 40 160 300 180 20 -120 -130 km/h mph CRIUSE SET ECO F E 7 ABS 5 4 H C DT 2 6 2 x1000 rpm DRIVE BRAKE 封 5

* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more details refer to the "Gauges" in the next pages.

OAM042030C/OAM042302C

Close-up of a car interior showing a switch and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Instrument panel illumination

When the vehicle's parking lights or headlights are on, rotate the illumination control knob to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination.

Type A 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 20 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480 500 520 540 560 580 600 620 640 660 680 700 720 740 760 780 800 820 840 860 880 900 920 940 960 980 1000 1020 1040 1060 1080 1100 1120 1140 1160 1180 1200 1220 1240 1260 1280 1300 1320 1340 1360 1380 1400 OAM042031L

■ Type B M042032 60 80 100 120 140 150 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 460 480 500 520 540 560 580 600 620 640 660 680 700 720 740 760 780 800 820 840 860 880 900 920 940 960 980 1000 1020 1040 1060 1080 1100 1120 1140 1160 1180 1200 OAM042303L

Gauges

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the forward speed of the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in kilometers per hour and/or miles per hour.

Close-up of a dark, semi-circular gauge or speedometer with a central knob and scale markings (no readable text or symbols beyond the dial)

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

When the door is opened, or if the engine is not started within 1 minute, the tachometer pointer may move slightly in the ON position with the engine OFF. This movement is normal and will not affect the accuracy of the tachometer once the engine is running.

CAUTION - Red zone

Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine damage.

Close-up of a dial with magnifying glass and letter 'H' on the right, showing no readable text or symbols beyond the dial markings.

Engine temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is ON.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "If the engine overheats" in section 6.

If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the "H" position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.

I F 0 E OAM042034

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in section 8. The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.

WARNING - Fuel gauge

Stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the E level. Running out of fuel can expose vehicle occupants to danger.

CAUTION - Low fuel

Avoid driving with extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging catalytic converter.

■ Type A

ODO 888888 km

OAM042110

■ Type B

P TRIP A 123.6km ODO 000000km

OAM042270

Odometer (km)

The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

TRIP TRISP OAM042035

Trip computer (if equipped)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving on the display when the ignition switch is in the ON position. All stored driving information (except distance to empty) is reset if the battery is disconnected.

graph TD
    A["Trip A"] --> B["Trip B"]
    B --> C["Distance to empty*"]
    C --> D["Average fuel consumption*"]
    D --> E["Instant fuel consumption*"]
    E --> F["Elapsed time"]
    F --> G["ECO* ON/OFF"]
    G --> A

* if equipped

■ Type A TRIP 1236 000 123456 km OAM042111

Type B P TRIP A 123.6km OAM042271

Tripmeter (km)

This mode indicates the distance of individual trips selected since the last tripmeter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to 999.9 km.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1 second, when the tripmeter is being displayed, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).

■ Type A RANGE 369 ODO 123456 km ■ Type B OAM042112C P RANGE 369km OAM042272C

Distance to empty (km)

This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty based on the current fuel in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel delivered to the engine. When the remaining distance is below 50 km, “---” will be displayed and the distance to empty indicator will blink.

The meter's working range is from 50 to 1500 km.

- If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupted, the "Distance to empty" function may not operate correctly.

The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.

• The fuel consumption and distance to empty values may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.

- The distance to empty value is an estimate of the available driving distance. This value may differ from the actual driving distance available.

■ Type A L/100km 16.4 AVG. ODO 123456 km ■ Type B OAM042114C P | Average 16.4L/100km ODO 123456 km OAM042274C

Average fuel consumption (t/100 km) This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the distance since the last average consumption reset. The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel consumption input.

For an accurate calculation, drive more than 50 m (0.03 miles).

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1 second, when the average fuel consumption is being displayed, clears the average fuel consumption to zero (--.-).

If the vehicle speed exceeds 1km/h (1.6 MPH) after being refueled with more than 6 l(1.6 gallons), the average fuel economy will be cleared to zero (----).

Type B P L/100km 0 10 20 CDO 123456 km OAM042275C

Instant fuel economy (if equipped) (L/100 km or MPG)

This mode calculates the instant fuel consumption during the last few seconds.

■ Type A E/T 12:34 ODO 123456m ■ Type B OAM042116N P Elapsed 12:34 OAM042276N

Driving time

This mode indicates the total time traveled since the last driving time reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the driving time keeps going while the engine is running.

The meter's working range is from 00:00\~99:59.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1 second, when the driving time is being displayed, clears the driving time to zero (00:00).

■ Type A ECO ON ECO OFF OAM042105 ■ Type B ECO Drive ON ECO Drive OFF OAM042277N Manual transaxle shift indicator ON/OFF (if equipped)

You can turn the shift indicator on/off on the instrument cluster in this mode.

If you push the TRIP button for more than 1 second in the ECO ON mode, ECO OFF is displayed in the screen and the shift indicator turns off.

If you want to display the shift indicator again, press the TRIP button for more than 1 second in the ECO OFF mode and then ECO ON mode is displayed in the screen.

Outside temperature

The current outside temperature is displayed in 1°C (1°F) increments. The temperature range is between -40°C \~ 60°C (-40°F \~ 140°F).

• The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive.
• To convert from °F to °C or °C to °F press the TRIP button for more than 1 seconds in the Distance to empty mode.

Type A

PANGE/TAVG km/L/HD/km-MPG 8888 6888e ODO 000000 ml 000000 km

OAM042332N

■ Type B

3 123456 KPT

OAM042341L

Manual transaxle shift indicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs you which gear is desired while driving to save fuel.

For example

▲3: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).

▼3: Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).

- If you don't want the indicator displayed, you can turn it off by pressing the TRIP button for more than 1 second in the ECO ON mode.

The ECO ON mode will change to the ECO OFF mode.

- If you want the indicator displayed, press the TRIP button for more than 1 second in the ECO OFF mode.

The ECO OFF mode will change to the ECO ON mode.

■ Type A

TRIP RANGE/TAVG km/L/100mmPG 8888 8887 DDO 8888 8887 km

OAM042331N

■ Type B

P DO 123450 km

OAM042340L

Automatic transaxle shift position indicator (if equipped)

The indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.

Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). Any light that does not illuminate should be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

After starting the engine, check to make sure that all warning lights are off. If any warning lights are still on, this indicates a situation that needs attention. When releasing the parking brake, the brake system warning light should go off. The fuel warning light will stay on if the fuel level is low.

ECOMINDER® indicator (if equipped)

ECO

When the active ECO is operating the ECOMINDER® indicator is green.

For more detailed information, refer to "Active ECO" in chapter 5.

WARNING - ECOMINDER® indicator

Don't keep watching the "ECO" ECOMINDER® indicator while driving. It may distract you while driving and cause an accident.

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

This light also comes on when the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is not working properly. If the AIR BAG warning light does not come on, or continuously remains on after operating for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition switch to the ON position or started the engine, or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light

This warning light illuminates if the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the system is operating normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, this indicates that the ABS may have malfunctioned.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible. The normal braking system will still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.

Electronic brake force distribution (EBD) system warning light

If these two warning lights shown illuminate at the same time while driving, the ABS and EBD system may have malfunctioned.

In this case, your ABS and regular brake system may not work normally. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

If the ABS warning light or EBD warning light is on and stays on, the speedometer or odometer/tripmeter may not work. In this case, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING - ABS/brake lights

If both ABS and brake warning lights are on and stay on, your vehicle's brake system will not work normally during sudden braking. In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

Seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON, regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned on, the seat belt warning light and the seat belt warning chime will operate for approximately 6 seconds. But if the belt is rest fastened within the 6 seconds, the warning chime will turn off and the warning light will blink for the remainder of the 6 second period.

If the driver's seat belt is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds. But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light will turn off immediately.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph), the seat belt warning light and chime will operate approximately 11 times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and 24 seconds off until the belt is fastened or the vehicle speed decreases below 5 km/h (3 mph).

Turn signal indicator

The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink, blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not illuminate at all, it indicates a malfunction in the turn signal system. You should consult your dealer for repairs.

High beam indicator

Tail light indicator (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

This indicator illuminates when the tail lights are on.

Front fog light indicator (if equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light

The indicator illuminates when the front fog lights ON.

This warning light indicates the engine oil pressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates while driving:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and stop.

2. With the engine off, check the engine oil level. If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, call an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Engine damage

If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illuminated and stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may result.

The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on, then go out when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, there is a serious malfunction.

Parking brake & brake fluid warning light

Parking brake warning

This light is illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position. The warning light should go off after a few seconds when the parking brake is released.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may indicate that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required. Then check all brake components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are found, the warning light remains on or the brakes do not operate properly. Have the vehicle towed to any authorized Kia dealer for a brake system inspection and necessary repairs.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the brake circuits is damaged or malfunctions. With only one of the circuits working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the vehicle. Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working. If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

To check bulb operation, check whether the parking brake and brake fluid warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System indicator (if equipped)

Low tire pressure indicator / TPMS malfunction indicator

The low tire pressure telltale comes on for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position.

The low tire pressure telltale illuminates when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated.

The low tire pressure telltale will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

If this occurs, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

If the warning light illuminates while driving, reduce vehicle speed immediately and stop the vehicle. Avoid hard braking and overcorrecting the steering wheel. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire information placard.

⚠ WARNING - Low tire pressure

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure tires will cause the tires to overheat and fail.

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors.
• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

Charging system warning light

This warning light indicates a malfunction of either the generator or electrical charging system.

If the warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the generator drive belt for looseness or breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical charging system. Have an authorized Kia dealer correct the problem as soon as possible.

Tailgate open warning light

Immobilizer indicator (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates when the tailgate is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position.

Door ajar warning light

Without smart key system

This light illuminates when the immobilizer key is inserted and turned to the ON position to start the engine.

At this time, you can start the engine. The light goes out after the engine is running.

If this light blinks when the ignition switch is in the ON position before starting the engine, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

This warning light illuminates when a door is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position.

With smart key system

If any of the following occurs in a vehicle equipped with the smart key, the immobilizer indicator illuminates, blinks or goes off.

- When the smart key is in the vehicle, if the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC or ON position, the indicator will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds to indicate that you are able to start the engine. However, when the smart key is not in the vehicle, if the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed, the indicator will blink for a few seconds to indicate that you are not be able to start the engine.

- If the indicator illuminates only for 2 seconds and goes out when the ENGINE START/STOP button is turned to ON position with the smart key in the vehicle, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

- When the battery is weak, if the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed, the indicator will blink and you are not able to start the engine. However, you are able to start the engine by inserting the smart key in the smart key holder. Also, if the smart key system related parts have a problem, the indicator will blink.

Auto stop indicator (if equipped)

Low washer fluid level warning indicator

Low fuel level warning light

This indicator will illuminate when the engine enters the Idle Stop mode of the ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.

When the automatic starting occurs, the auto stop indicator on the cluster will blink for 5 seconds.

For more details, refer to the ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system in section 5.

This warning light indicates the washer fluid reservoir is nearly empty. Refill the washer fluid as soon as possible.

This warning light indicates the fuel tank is nearly empty. When it comes on, you should add fuel as soon as possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).

\*NOTICE

When the engine automatically starts by the ISG system, some warning lights (ABS, ESP, ESPOFF, EPS or Parking brake warning light) may turn on for a few seconds. This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean the system is malfunctioning.

Fuel cap open warning indicator

This warning light indicates the fuel filler cap is not tighten securely.

Always make sure that the fuel filler cap is tight.

Malfunction indicator (MIL) (check engine light)

This indicator light is part of the Engine Control System which monitors various emission control system components. If this light illuminates while driving, it indicates that a potential malfunction has been detected somewhere in the emission control system.

This light will also illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will go out in a few seconds after the engine is started. If it illuminates while driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, take your vehicle to the nearest authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

Generally, your vehicle will continue to be drivable, but have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer promptly.

CAUTION - MIL illumination

• Prolonged driving with the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the emission control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel economy.
• If the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible. This could result in loss of engine power. Have the Engine Control System inspected as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) indicator (if equipped)

The ESC indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approximately 3 seconds. When the ESC is on, it monitors the driving conditions and under normal driving conditions, the ESC indicator will remain off. When a slippery or low traction condition is encountered, the ESC will operate, and the ESC indicator will blink to indicate the ESC is operating.

If this indicator illuminates and stays on, the ESC may have malfunctioned. Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

ESC OFF indicator (if equipped)

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, but should go off after approximately 3 seconds. To switch to ESC function off, press the ESC OFF button. The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate indicating the ESC is deactivated.

Cruise indicators (if equipped)

CRUISE indicator

The indicator illuminates when the cruise control system is enabled.

The cruise indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control ON-OFF switch on the steering wheel is pushed.

The indicator goes off when the cruise control ON-OFF switch is pushed again. For more information about the use of cruise control, refer to "Cruise control system" in section 5.

Cruise SET indicator

SET

The indicator illuminates when the cruise function switch (SET - or RES +) is ON.

The cruise SET indicator in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control switch (SET - or RES +) is pushed.

The cruise SET indicator does not illuminate when the cruise control switch (CANCEL) is pushed or the system is disengaged.

KEY OUT indicator (if equipped)

KEY OUT

When the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC or ON position, if any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, the indicator will blink, and if all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds. The indicator will go off while the vehicle is moving. Keep the smart key in the vehicle or insert it in the smart key holder.

EPS (Electronic Power Steering) system warning light

This indicator light comes on after the ignition key is turned to the ON position and then it will go out.

This light also comes on when the EPS has some problems. If it comes on while driving, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Key reminder warning chime (if equipped)

If the driver's door is opened while the ignition key is left in the ignition switch (ACC or LOCK position), the key reminder warning chime will sound. This is to prevent you from locking your keys in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the key is removed from the ignition switch or the driver's door is closed.

LCD display warning (if equipped)

Key is not in vehicle

If the smart key is not in the vehicle and if any door is opened or closed with the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ACC, ON, or START position, the warning illuminates on the LCD display. Also, the chime sounds for 5 seconds when the smart key is not in the vehicle and the door is closed.

Always have the smart key with you.

Key is not detected

If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is not detected and you press the ENGINE START/STOP button, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for 10 seconds. Also, the immobilizer indicator and the key holder light blinks for 10 seconds.

Low key battery

If the ENGINE START/STOP button turns to the OFF position when the smart key in the vehicle discharges, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds. Also, the warning chime sounds once. Replace the battery with a new one.

Press brake pedal to start engine

If the ENGINE START/STOP button turns to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should depress the brake pedal to start the engine.

Press clutch pedal to start engine (if equipped)

If the ENGINE START/STOP button turns to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the clutch pedal, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should depress the clutch pedal to start the engine.

Shift to "P" position

If you try to turn off the engine without the shift lever in the P (Park) position, the ENGINE START/STOP button will turn to the ACC position. If the button is pressed once more it will turn to the ON position. The warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should press the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) position to turn off the engine.

Also, the warning chime sounds for about 10 seconds. (if equipped)

Remove key

When you turn off the engine with the smart key in the smart key holder, the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds. Also, the smart key holder light blinks for about 10 seconds.

To remove the smart key push the smart key once and pull it out from the smart key holder.

Insert key

If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while "Key is not detected" illuminates on the LCD display, the warning "Insert key" illuminates for about 10 seconds. Also, the immobilizer indicator and the key holder light blinks for about 10 seconds.

Press start button again

If you can not operate the ENGINE START/STOP button when there is a problem with the ENGINE START/STOP button system, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds and the chime sounds continuously to indicate that you could start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button once more.

The chime will stop if the ENGINE START/STOP button system works normally or the theft alarm system is armed.

If the warning illuminates each time you press the ENGINE START/STOP button, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine

If you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral) position, the warning illuminates for about 10 seconds on the LCD display.

You can also start the engine with the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position, but for your safety start the engine with the shift lever in the P(Park) position.

Press start button while turn steering

If the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display. Also, the warning chime sounds once and the ENGINE START/STOP button light blinks for 10 seconds.

When you are warned, press the ENGINE START/STOP button while turning the steering wheel right and left.

Steering wheel unlocked (if equipped)

If the steering wheel does not lock normally when the ENGINE START/STOP button turns to the OFF position, the warning illuminates for 10 minutes on the LCD display. If locks when the door is opened or when you pull out the smart key from the smart key holder.

Check steering wheel lock

If the steering wheel does not lock normally when the ENGINE START/STOP button turns to the OFF position, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display. Also, the warning chime sounds for 3 seconds and the ENGINE START/STOP button light blinks for 10 seconds.

Low tire pressure (if equipped)

If one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, the warning illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display.

REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

Rear view display OAM042025N PEND OAM042308 OAM042037

The rearview camera will activate when the back-up light is ON with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.

This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle through the rearview display mirror while backing-up.

The rearview camera may be turned off by pressing the ON/OFF button (1) when the rearview camera is activated.

To turn the camera on again, press the ON/OFF button (1) again when the ignition switch is on and the shift lever in R (Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on automatically whenever the ignition switch is turned off and on again.

Always keep the camera lens clean. If lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not operate normally.

WARNING - Rearview camera

The rear view camera is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the middle of the vehicle. The camera does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle. While the camera's display is generally accurate, objects can be much closer than they appear in the display screen and can be distorted in both size and proportion.

WARNING - Backing & using camera

Never rely solely on the rear view camera when backing. You must always use methods of viewing the area behind you including looking over both shoulders as well as continuously checking all three rear view mirrors. Due to the difficulty of ensuring that the area behind you remains clear, always back slowly and stop immediately if you even suspect that a person, and especially a child, might be behind you.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

Interior view of a car dashboard with two views showing the front and side (no text or symbols visible)

The hazard warning flasher should be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the vehicle in a hazardous location. When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch. Both turn signal lights will blink. The hazard warning lights will operate even though the key is not in the ignition switch.

To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the switch again.

LIGHTING

Headlamp escort (if equipped)

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or OFF position with the headlights ON, the headlights remain on for about 20 minutes. However, if the driver's door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 30 seconds.

The headlights can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the transmitter (or smart key) twice or turning the light switch to the OFF or Auto position. However, if you turn the light switch to the Auto position when it is dark outside, the headlights will not be turned off immediately.

Battery saver function

- The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the parking lights when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door (in that order).

- With this feature, the parking lights will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of the road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Daytime running light

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system turns OFF when:

1. The headlight are ON.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. Engine stops.
4. The turn signal light is ON.

1 2 3 4 AUTO OFF 扣 OFF

OXM049110 OAM049041 OAM049042

Hand holding a device with directional buttons labeled 'OFF' and weather icons, indicating a rotary switch or adjustment.

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the parking light position (1st position), the tail, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON.

Close-up of a hand holding a black handheld device with control buttons and an arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols visible)

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the head-light position (2nd position), the head, tail, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON.

The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlights.

AUTO OFF 1 OMD040095

OFF OFF M049044 OAM049043

Illustration of a hand pointing at a device control knob with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO light position, the taillights and headlights will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

• Never place anything over sensor (1) located on the instrument panel. This will ensure better auto-light system control.
• Don't clean the sensor using a window cleaner. The cleaner may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the Auto light system may not work properly.

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights, push the lever away from you. Pull it back for low beams.

The high beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return to the normal (low beam) position when released. The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature.

WARNING - High beams

Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.

A B B A OFF OFF OFF OAM049045

Turn signals and lane change signals

The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function. To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down (A). The green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, a bulb may be burned OAM049045 OAM049046N out of have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.

Close-up of a hand holding a black handheld device with control buttons and a yellow 'OK' button (no readable text or symbols beyond basic labels)

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch (1) is turned to the on position after the headlight is turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light switch (1) to the OFF position.

When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer (if equipped)

A MIST OFF INT LO HI B C D ON INT OFF E OAM049100N/OAM049048N

A : Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF - Off
- INT – Intermittent wipe
- LO - Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)

D : Rear wiper/washer control

- ON – Continuous wipe

- INT – Intermittent wipe (if equipped)

· OFF - Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

MIST OFF INT LO HI OAM049101N

LO : Normal wiper speed

HI : Fast wiper speed

If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.

OAM049101N OAM049102N

Windshield wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.

MIST: For a single wiping cycle, push the lever upward and release it with the lever in the OFF position. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is pushed upward and held.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1).

Diagram showing a hand interacting with a digital camera module labeled with icons like 'OFF', 'ON', and 'MAX'.

Windshield washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles.

Use this function when the wind-shield is dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side.

CAUTION - Washer pump

To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

WARNING - Obscured visibility

Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first warming the windshield with the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision.

CAUTION - Wipers& windshields

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

Close-up of a hand holding a camera lens with a yellow directional arrow (no text or symbols on the lens itself)

Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped)

The rear window wiper switch is located at the end of the wiper and washer switch lever. Turn the switch to the desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer.

ON - Normal wiper operation INT - Intermittent wiper operation (if equipped)

OFF - Wiper is not in operation Push the lever away from you to spray rear washer fluid and to run the rear wipers 1\~3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.

INTERIOR LIGHT

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

WARNING - Interior light

Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark. The glare from the interior lights may obstruct your view and cause an accident.

■ Type A DOGS 1 2 1 OAM042052

Map lamp

Push the lens (1) to turn the map lamp on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.

(2) DOOR

The light will turn on as below if the button is pressed.

The light will turn off if the button is pressed again. The light comes on when any door (or tailgate) is opened regardless of the ignition switch position. When doors are unlocked by the transmitter or the key is removed from the ignition switch, the light comes on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. The light goes out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed.

However, if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked, the light will turn off immediately. If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the light stays on for about 20 minutes. However, if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position, the light stays on continuously.

Type B ① ② ③ OAM049053

Room lamp

The light will turn on and off according to the switch position.

(1) OFF

The light stays off at all times.

(2) DOOR

The light comes on when any door (or tailgate) is opened regardless of the ignition switch position. When doors are unlocked by the transmitter or the key is removed from the ignition switch, the light comes on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. The light goes out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed.

However, if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked, the light will turn off immediately. If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the light stays on for about 20 minutes. However, if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position, the light stays on continuously.

(3) ON

The light stays on at all times.

Do not leave the lamp switches on for an extended period of time when the vehicle is not running.

Close-up of a car's rear door panel with a yellow arrow pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols visible)

Luggage room lamp

The luggage room lamp comes on when the tailgate is opened.

The lamp comes on as long as the tailgate is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the tailgate securely after using the luggage room.

Interior view of a car showing airflow direction and a highlighted component (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car showing the backrest door, intake tray, and control panel with yellow arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Glove box lamp (if equipped)

The glove box lamp comes on when the glove box is opened.

To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the glove box securely after using the glove box.

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

Pull the sunvisor downward and you can turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or OFF by pushing the button.

• To turn the lamp ON.

- O : To turn the lamp OFF.

To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, turn off the lamp by pushing the O button after using the lamp.

DEFROSTER

CAUTION - Conductors

To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to "Windshield defrosting and defogging" in this section.

■ Type A FRONT FEAR OAM042056

■ Type B OFF FRONT REAR OAM042309

■ Type C FRONT AUTO CLIMA OAM042310

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the rear window, while the engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

Outside rearview mirror defroster (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A/C MAX A/C AIR FRONT AIR NEAR

1. Fan speed control knob
2. Mode selection button
3. Temperature control knob
4. Air intake control button (fresh/recirculated)
5. Front window defroster button
6. Rear window defroster button
7. Air conditioning button

OAM042057

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling;

• Heating: √

• Cooling:

• Set the temperature control to the desired position.

• Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
• Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
• If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

A A A B B D C D C E OAM042061

Circular mechanical component with four yellow directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

OAM042058L

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent.

Vent mode (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

Floor mode (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

Floor/Defrost mode (A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost mode (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

Interior view of a car dashboard and infotainment device showing internal components (no text or symbols visible)

MAX A/C A/C

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumb-wheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flow from the ventilation system. To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right position for warm air or left position for cooler air.

Close-up of a car air conditioning dashboard with three rotary gauges and a yellow directional arrow (no text or symbols visible)

To operate the MAX A/C, turn the temperature knob to extreme left. Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face.

In this mode, the air conditioning and the recirculated air position will be selected automatically.

1 2 3 0 4 0 ↑

OAM042063

Air intake control

The air intake control is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING - Recirculated air

Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

⚠ WARNING - Reduced visibility

Continued use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

MAX A/C A/C

OAM042065

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation.

The fan speed knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flow from the ventilation system. To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed, or left for lower speed. To turn the fan speed control off, turn the knob to the "0" position.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.
6. If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the 🎨 or 🌐 position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
  • Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant which does not damage the ozone layer.

1. Start the engine. Press the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.
5. When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position, set the mode control to the MAX A/C position, then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

CAUTION - Excessive A/C

When using the air conditioning system, monitor the engine coolant closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating and potential engine damage. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.

Outside air Recirculated air Blower Climate control air filter Evaporator core Heater core 1LDA5047

Climate control air filter (if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

\*NOTICE

- Replace the filter every 24,000 km or once a year.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required.

- When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized Kia dealer.

Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative impact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Compressor damage

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

■ Type A

1 2 AUTO 5 AUTO 88:8°C A/C A/C OFF 6 9 TEMP 3 - A/C 7 FROM 100 4 - READ 100 8 MODE 10

1. Temperature control button
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Air conditioning button
4. Air intake control button
5. A/C display
6. OFF button
7. Front windshield defroster button
8. Rear windshield defroster button
9. Fan speed control switch
10. Mode selection button

OAM042200

■ Type B

1 TEMP 2 AUTO 3 MODE 4 OFF 5 A/C 6 CLIMATE 7 9 10

1. Temperature control button
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. Rear windshield defroster button
4. Mode selection button
5. AUTO (automatic control) button
6. OFF button
7. Climate information selection button
8. Air conditioning button
9. Air intake control button
10. Fan speed control switch

OAM042312

Type A Type B AUTO A/C FRONT MOD AUTO CLIMA

Automatic heating and air con- ditioning

The automatic climate control system is controlled by simply setting the desired temperature.

The Full Automatic Temperature Control (FATC) system automatically controls the heating and cooling system as follows;

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicated by AUTO on the display. The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by temperature setting.

2. Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.

If the temperature is set to the lowest setting (Lo), the air conditioning system will operate continuously.

1. To turn the automatic operation off, select any button or switch of the following:

2. Mode selection button
   • Air conditioning button

3. Front windshield defroster button
   • Air intake control button
   • Fan speed control switch

The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.

Regardless of the temperature setting, when using automatic operation, the air conditioning system can automatically turn on to decrease the humidity inside the vehicle, even if the temperature is set to warm.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing downward, no visible text or symbols

OUN026312OAM042313

Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual heating and air conditioning

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected.

When pressing any button (or turning any knob) except AUTO button while automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.
   Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.

Type A Type B MODE AUTO OFF CLIMATE MODE OAM042314

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

Refer to the illustration in the "Manual climate control system".

The air flow outlet port is converted as follows:

- Vent mode (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is discharged towards the face and floor.

Floor mode (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defroster.

Floor/Defrost mode (A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost mode (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet port can be opened or closed separately using the thumb-wheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

Type A Type B TEMP TEMP OAM042316

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to the maximum (HI) by pushing the button (∧).

The temperature will decrease to the minimum (Lo) by pushing the button (√).

When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by 0.5^ C/1°F. When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.

Temperature scale conversion

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Fahrenheit.

This is normal condition. You can switch the temperature scale as follows;

While pressing the AUTO button, press the OFF button for 3 seconds or more. The temperature scale will change from Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to Centigrade.

Type A Type B AUTO A/C OFF A/C OAM042317

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the button illuminates when the recirculated air position is selected.

With the recirculated air position selected, air from passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the button does not illuminate when the outside (fresh) air position is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

⚠ WARNING - Recirculated air

Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

⚠ WARNING - Reduced visibility

Continued climate control system operation in the recirculated air position may allow humidity to increase inside vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating in recirculated air position will cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected, will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

Type A Type B OAM042318

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by pressing the fan speed control button.

To change the fan speed, press the button ( ∧ for higher speed, or push the button ( ∨ for lower speed. To turn the fan speed control off, press the OFF button and select outside (fresh) air position.

Type A AUTO A/C OFF Type B A/C OAM042319

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate).

Push the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

Type A OFF FRONT READ Type B MODE OFF CLIMATE OAM042321

Blower OFF

Push the OFF button to turn off the blower. However you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the position ON.

Features of your vehicle

■ Type B MODE AUTO OFF CLIMATE A/C OAM042320

Climate information screen selection (if equipped)

Press the climate information screen selection button to view climate information in full screen mode.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING - Windshield heating

Do not use the position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to the lower speed.

• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grille to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windshield.

1

3

3

OAM042066

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windshield

1. Select any fan speed except "0" position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select 📄 the 🌐 or mode.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

1 2 3 0 4 A/C TEMP 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 0 4 A/C 3 FRONT 4 OAM042067 OAM042322 A/C

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest (extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

Automatic climate control sys- tem

To defog inside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the desired position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button ( )
4. The air-conditioning will be turned on according to the detected ambient temperature, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed will be selected automatically.

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button or knob manually.

If the position is selected, with a low fan speed, a higher fan speed may be automatically selected.

TEMP 1 2 3 4 FRONT A/C

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set fan speed to the highest position.
2. Set temperature to the Maximum (HI).
3. Press the defrost button ( )
4. The air-conditioning will be turned on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, with a low fan speed, a higher fan speed may be automatically selected.

Defogging logic

To reduce the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions such as position. To cancel or return to the defogging logic, do the following.

STAIR STOP 1 2 3 OAM0420680

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to the defrost position ( )
3. Push the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator light in the air intake control button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it will be reset to the defog logic status.

LOCK START STOP 1 2 FRONT 3 A/C OAM042324

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select the defrost position pressing defrost button (###)
3. While holding the air conditioning button (A/C) pressed, press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it will be reset to the defog logic status.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

These compartments can be used to store small items.

• To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.
• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while driving. Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover cannot close securely.

WARNING - Flammable materials

Do not store, propane cylinders or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with a yellow arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols visible)

Center console storage

These compartments can be used to store small items required by the driver or front passenger.

Close-up of a car's front and side panels showing airflow or exhaust flow (no text or symbols visible)

OAM049070OAM049069

Glove box

To open the glove box, pull the handle and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after use.

Always keep the glove box closed while the vehicle is in operation.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted touchscreen display (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a car showing the backrest tray and vent, with a yellow arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Multi box (if equipped)

To open the box, pull the lever and the cover will open.

Push down the cover to close.

Luggage box (if equipped)

You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy access.

INTERIOR FEATURES

Close-up of a car interior control panel with a yellow arrow pointing to the left side (no visible text or symbols)

OAM042076 OAM

Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

For the cigarette lighter to work, the ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way into its socket. When the element is heated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.

If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter, use only a genuine Kia replacement or its approved equivalent.

• Do not hold the lighter in after it is already heated because it will overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out within 30 seconds, remove it to prevent overheating.

CAUTION - Cigarette lighter

Do not insert accessories into the cigarette lighter socket. Doing so can damage the lighter socket.

Mechanical component diagram showing a valve or lever mechanism with a yellow arrow pointing to the valve (no text or symbols present)

Ashtray (if equipped)

To use the ashtray, open the cover. To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out. Do not use the vehicle's ashtrays as waste receptacles.

WARNING - Ashtray use Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a fire.

Cup holder

WARNING - Hot liquids

Do not place uncovered cups with hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you burn yourself. Such a burn to the driver could lead to loss of control of the vehicle.

Close-up of a mechanical component with two yellow arrows pointing to features, no visible text or symbols.

M042337N

Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows.

To use the sunvisor, pull it down- ward.

To use the sunvisor for the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (3). (if equipped)

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and pull up the mirror cover (4).

CAUTION

• Always have the switch in the off position when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed without the lamp off, it may discharge the battery or damage the sunvisor.
• Always use the sunvisor extension, after swing the sunvisor to the side.

WARNING

For your safety, do not obstruct your vision when using the sun- visor.

Front (Type A) Front (Type B) Rear (if equipped) OAM049079 OAM042079N OAM049080

Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.

• Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 10A in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle's power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

WARNING - Electric shock

Do not put a finger or a foreign element (pin, etc.) into a power outlet and do not touch with a wet hand. You may get an electric shock.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a magnified inset showing a small circular feature (no text or symbols visible)

Shopping bag holder (if equipped)

Do not hang a bag weighing more than 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause damage to the shopping bag holder.

Close-up of a car interior showing a curved handle and a small circular emblem on the lid (no text or symbols visible)

Clothes hanger

CAUTION - Heavy clothes

Do not hang heavy clothes, the hook may be damaged.

Two grayscale images showing a mechanical component with labeled Type A and Type B, no readable text or symbols present.

Floor mat anchor(s)

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward.

WARNING - After market floor mat

Do not install aftermarket floor mats that are not capable of being securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors. Unsecured floor mats can interfere with pedal operation.

The following must be observed when installing ANY floormat to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floormats are securely attached to the vehicle's floormat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floormat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floormat anchors.
• Do not stack floormats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor-mat). Only a single floormat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver's side floor-mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floormat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, Kia recommends that only the Kia floormat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

Interior view of a car trunk with visible mesh material and side panel (no text or symbols)

Luggage net holder (if equipped)

To keep items from shifting in the cargo area, you can use the holders located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net.

If necessary, contact your authorized Kia dealer to obtain a luggage net.

To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.

WARNING - Luggage net Always keep your face and body out of the luggage net recoil path and avoid using the luggage net when the straps have visible signs of wear or damage. The luggage net can snap and cause injuries.

Interior view of a car showing the rear trunk and seat area with a yellow arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols visible)

Cargo screen (if equipped)

Use the cargo screen to hide items stored in the cargo area.

Interior view of a car showing the rear trunk and side seats, with an inset close-up highlighting a cable being inserted (no text or symbols visible)

To use the cargo screen, insert the 4 edges into the slots.

Interior view of a car showing the rear trim and side seats, with a highlighted component inset (no text or symbols)

When not in use, remove the 2 rear edges from the slot and attach the cargo screen to the seat back by using the magic tape on the back of the cargo screen.

WARNING - Objects

- Do not place objects on the cargo screen. Such objects may be thrown about inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants during an accident or when braking.

CAUTION - Luggage

Since the cargo screen may be damaged or malformed, do not put the luggage on it when it is used.

EXTERIOR FEATURES

Exterior view of a car showing roof trim and side window (no text or symbols)

Roof rack (if equipped)

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can load cargo on top of your vehicle.

The following specification is the maximum weight that can be loaded onto the roof rack. Distribute the load as evenly as possible on the roof rack and secure the load firmly.

ROOF 75 kg (165 lbs.)
RACK	EVENLY	DISTRIBUTED

Loading cargo or luggage in excess of the specified weight limit on the roof rack may damage your vehicle.

⚠️ CAUTION - Using roof rock

When carrying cargo on the roof rack, take the necessary precautions to make sure the cargo does not damage the roof of the vehicle.

When carrying large objects on the roof rack, make sure they do not exceed the overall roof length or width.

NOTICE

If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-roof, be sure not to position cargo onto the roof rack in such a way that it could interfere with sunroof operation.

⚠ WARNING - Center of gravity

Always drive slowly and turn corners carefully when carrying items on the roof rack. The vehicle center of gravity will be higher when items are loaded onto the roof rack.

- To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving, check frequently before or while driving to make sure the items on the roof rack are securely fastened.

- Always drive slowly and turn corners carefully when carrying items on the roof rack. Severe wind updrafts, caused by passing vehicles or natural causes, can cause sudden upward pressure on items loaded on the roof rack. This is especially true when carrying large, flat items such as wood panels or mattresses. This could cause the items to fall off the roof rack and cause damage to your vehicle or others around you.

AUDIO SYSTEM

If you install an aftermarket HID head lamps, your vehicle's audio and electronic devices may malfunction.

3D rendered diagram of a pen-like tool with a yellow ring and base, no text or symbols present

Antenna (if equipped)

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to receive AM or/and FM broadcast signals.

This antenna is removable. To remove the roof antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To install the roof antenna, turn it clockwise.

CAUTION - Antenna

Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove the antenna by rotating it counterclockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.

• When reinstalling your roof antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper reception. But it could be removed when parking the vehicle or when loading cargo on the roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof rack, do not place the cargo near the antenna pole to ensure proper reception.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with dashboard and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Audio remote control (if equipped)

The steering wheel audio remote control button is installed to promote safe driving.

Do not operate the audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

VOLUME (1 + 1 -

• Push up the lever to increase volume.
• Push down the lever to decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET (∧) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed for 0.8 second or more, it will work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button.

CDP mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

CDC mode

It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed for less than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION select buttons.

CDP mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN button.

CDC mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN button.

MODE (3)

Press the button to select Radio or CD (compact disc).

MUTE (4)

• Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to activate the sound.

Detailed information for audio control buttons is described in the following pages in this section.

AIR Platform OAM049088

Aux, USB and iPod®\* port (if equipped)

If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod port, you can use an aux port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and also an iPod port to plug in an iPod.

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

OAM049054L COLOR HIGH ④ ⑤ OAM041110

Advanced lighting speaker (if equipped)

The advanced lighting speaker that lights around the front speaker is adjusted by turning the knob as follows.

1. OFF : The light turns off.

2. MUSIC : The light blinks or changes shade according to the sound of the audio.

If the audio is not turned on, the light does not turn on.

1. MOOD : The light shade changes automatically at regular interval.

2. COLOR : If the button is pushed, it changes the color of speaker to red, green, blue, sky-blue, purple and yellow.

3. +/- : When the lights are on, push the illumination button to adjust the light intensity.

If low lighting grade is selected, the intensity of light may be weak or may not illuminate according to the audio volume or selected condition.

The lighting around the front speaker may not illuminate when the sound of the audio is low.

Do not use the lights for extended periods when engine is not running. It may cause battery discharge.

FM radio reception

IONOSPHERE JBM001

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear. This can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

AM radio reception

IONOSPHERE JBM002

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.

FM radio station

graph TD
    A["Mountains"] --> B["Buildings"]
    B --> C["Iron bridges"]
    D["Unobstructed area"] --> B
    E["Road"] --> F["?"]

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

JBM004JBM003

- Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.

- Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

Station 2 88.1Mhz A B C Station 2 88.3Mhz A B JBM005

• Station Swapping - As a FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

Satellite radio reception

You may experience difficulties in receiving SIRIUS satellite radio signals in the following situations.

Diagram illustrating satellite communication with speech bubbles and a mountain, featuring speech bubbles for music and question marks.

SATELITE1

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a covered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top level of a multi-level freeway.
• If you drive under a bridge.
- If you are driving next to a tall vehicle (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the signal.
- If you are driving in a valley where the surrounding hills or peaks block the signal from the satellite.

- If you are driving on a mountain road where is the signal blocked by mountains.

graph TD
    A["Mountains"] --> B["Buildings"]
    B --> C["Iron bridges"]
    C --> D["Unobstructed area"]
    D --> E["Satellite"]
    E --> F["Wireless signal"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

• If you are driving in an area with tall trees that block the signal (10m / 30 ft. or more), for example on an road that goes through a dense forest.
  • The signal can become weak in some areas that are not covered by the SIRIUS repeater network.
  There may be other unforeseen circumstances leading to reception problems with the SIRIUS satellite radio signal.

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio equipment. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.

WARNING - Cell phone use

Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone.

Care of disc

• If the temperature inside the car is too high, open the car windows for ventilation before using your car audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA files without permission. Use CDs that are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as benzene and thinner, normal cleaners and magnetic sprays made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from getting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by the edges or the edges of the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of soft cloth before playback (wipe it from the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or attach pieces of sticky tape or paper onto it.

• Make sure on undesirable matter other than CDs are inserted into the CD player (Do not insert more than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use to protect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate normally according to manufacturing companies or making and recording methods. In such circumstances, if you still continue to use those CDs, they may cause the malfunction of your car audio system.

\*NOTICE - Playing an Incompatible Copy Protected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do not comply with the international audio CD standards (Red Book), may not play on your car audio. Please note that if you try to play copy protected CDs and the CD player does not perform correctly the CDs maybe defective, not the CD player.

■ AC1A0CSAN

SIRIUS MPB Bluetooth CLOCK FM/AM SAT CD/AUX POWER PUSH 1 2 3 4 5 6 SEEK SCAN MUTE CAT TRACK FOLDER VOL ENTER AUDIO PUSH FILE TUNE

AC170CSAN

SIRIUS 4/MPB CLOCK FM/AM SAT CD/AUX POWER FUSH 1 2 3 4 5 6 ✓ SEEK 3 4 5 6 TRACK SCAN MUTE CAT ✓ FOLDER VOL FILE TUNE DISP INFO SETUP ENTER AUDIO FUSH

■AC110CSAN

MP3 Bluetooth CLOCK FM AM CD/AUX POWER PUSH VOL 1 2 3 4 5 6 ✓ SEEK TRACK ✓ SCAN MUTE ✓ FOLDER ✓ DISP INFO SETUP ENTER AUDIO PUSH FILE TUNE

AC100CSAN

MPB CLOCK FM AM CD/AUX POWER PUSH 1 2 3 4 5 6 ✓ SEEK TRACK ✓ SCAN MUTE ✓ FOLDER ✓ VOL DISP INFO SETUP ENTER AUDIO PUSH FILE TUNE

FM/AM ① SAT CD/AUX POWER PUSH VOL ② 1 2 SEEK TRACK ③ FM AM CD/AUX POWER PUSH VOL

Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME and AUDIO CONTROL

1. FM/AM

The FM/AM button toggles between FM and AM. Listed below are the paths as the system switches from FM to AM and back to FM.

• FM/AM : FM1→FM2→AM→FM1...

FM Button

Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 and FM2 when the button is pressed each time.

AM Button

Pressing the AM in selects the AM band. AM Mode is displayed on the LCD.

2. & Knob VOLPO

• Turns the audio system on/off when the ignition switch is on ACC or ON.
• If the knob is turned clockwise/counterclockwise, the volume will increase /decrease.

3. SEEK

• When the √SEEK d, it will automatically tune to the next lower station.
• When the SEEK d, it will automatically tune to the next higher station.

4. SCAN

• When the button is pressed, it automatically scans the radio stations upwards.
• The SCAN feature steps through each station, starting from the initial station, for 5 seconds.
• Press the SCAN again to stop the scan feature and to listen to the currently selected channel.

5. MUTE

When the button is pressed, stops sound and "Audio Mute" is displayed on LCD.

6 DISP INFO 8 SETUP ENTER AUDIO RUSH SCAN MUTE CAT FOLDER 4 5 FILE TUNE

6. DISP

Turn the LCD Display & Backlight ON/OFF when DISP press.

7. PRESET Buttons

• 1 6 buttons than 0.8 seconds to play the sta- tion saved in each button.

• 1 6 button than 0.8 seconds or longer to save the current station to the respective button with a beep.

8. SETUP

Press this button to enter SETUP mode, If no action is taken for 8 seconds, it will return to previous mode.

SETUP 12:05 General Setting Main Media SAT P.Bass Phone Clock

In "SETUP" mode, rotate the TUNE knob to move the cursor between items, and push the TUNE knob to select.

• MAIN

Select this item to enter the Scroll and SDVC setup.

SETUP 12:05 less Text Scroll Scroll SDVC more

- SCROLL

Select whether long file names are scrolled continuously (On) or just once (Off).

SCROLL 12:05 Text Scroll ○ On ○ Off

• SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume Control)

Select this item to turn the SDVC feature On or Off. If it is turned ON, volume level is adjusted automatically according to the vehicle speed.

SDVC T2:05 Speed Dependent Volume Control ○ On ○ Off

• MEDIA

Select default display of MP3 play information. "Folder/File" or "Artist/Title" can be selected.

MEDIA MP3 Play Info. ® Folder/File ○ Artist/Title

• SAT

Select default display of SIRIUS mode. "Cat./Ch." or "Artist/Title" can be selected.

SAT 12:05 SIRIUS Satellite Radio ○ Cat. / Ch. ● Artist/Title

• CLOCK

Select this item to enter Clock setup mode. Adjust the hour and press the ENTER button to set. Adjust the minute and press the ENTER to complete and exit from clock adjustment mode.

Pressing the SETUP while in power off, screen will allow the user to make immediately adjustments to the clock.

CLOCK 12:05 12:30 Use Tuning Knob

- PHONE

Select this item to enter Bluetooth® wireless technology setup mode. Refer to "BLUETOOTH PHONE OPERATION" section for detailed information.

PHONE 12:05 Pair Phone Pair Select Prioriy Delete Advanced

• P.BASS (PowerBass)

This function creates virtual sound effects and allows adjustments to the Bass level.

Off → Low → Mid → High → Off...

※ AM Mode is not supported.

P.BASS 12:05 Power Bass Off Low Mid High

DISP INFO SETUP ENTER AUDIO FUSH 3 4 5 6 SCAN MUTE CAT FOLDER 9 FILE TUNE

9.TUNE & Audio Control Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease from current frequency.

(AM 10 kHz, FM 200 MHz)

Pressing the button changes the BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected is shown on the display. After selecting each mode, rotate the Audio control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

- BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the BASS, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

- MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

- TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

- FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize rear speaker sound (front speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenuated).

• BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize right speaker sound (left speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counter clockwise, left speaker sound will be emphasized (right speaker sound will be attenuated).

SIRIUS MP3 FM/AM SAT CD/AUX ② POWER PUSH VOL 1 2 3 4 SEEK TRACK SCAN MUTE ③ ④ ⑤

Using CD Player

1. CD Eject Button

- Press ▲ to eject the CD. This button works regardless of ignition switch status.

2. CD/AUX CD)

If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode. If no CD, it displays "No Media" for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.

3. 1 (RANDOM)

Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate 'RDM' mode and more than 0.8 seconds to activate 'ALL RDM' mode.

• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc are played back in a random sequence.
• ALL RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files in a disc are played back in the random sequence.

4. 2 (REPEAT)

Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate 'RPT' mode and more than 0.8 seconds to activate 'FLD RPT' mode.

• RPT : Only a track (file) is repeatedly played back.
• FLD RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only files in a folder are repeatedly played back.

5. SCAN

Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds. To cancel SCAN Play, press this button again.

6. CD Slot

Insert a CD label side up and gently push in while ignition switch is on ACC or ON. The audio automatically switches to CD mode and begins to play the CD.

If the audio was turned off, audio power will automatically turned on as the CD is inserted.

• This audio only recognizes 12cm-size, CD-DA (Audio CD) or ISO data-CD (MP3 CD).
• If UDF data-CD or non-CD (e.g. DVD) is inserted, "Reading Error" message will be displayed and the disc will be ejected.

Do not insert a CD if CD indicator is lit.

1 2 3 4 5 6 ✓ SEEK 3 4 TRACK SCAN MUTE ✓ CAT FOLDER ⑦ ⑧

7. TRACK

• Press √TRACK for less than 0.8 seconds to play from the beginning of current song.
• Press TRACK less than 0.8 seconds and press again within 1 second to play the previous song.
• Press TRACK 0.8 seconds or longer to initiate reverse direction high speed sound search of current song.
• Press TRACK ∧ for less than 0.8 seconds to play the next song.
• Press TRACK, 0.8 seconds or longer to initiate forward direction high speed sound search of current song.

DISP 9 INFO SETUP ENTER AUDIO PUSH 3 4 5 6 SCAN MUTE CAT FOLDER 10 FILE TUNE

8. FOLDER

- Press FOLDER move to child folder of the current folder and display the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move to the folder displayed. It will play the first song in the folder.

- Press FOLDER move to parent folder of the current folder and display the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to the folder displayed.

9. INFO

Displays the information of the current song.

• Audio CD : Disc Title/Artist, Track Title /Artist, Total Track.
- MP3 CD : File Name, Title, Artist, Album, Folder, Total Files (Not displayed if the information is unavailable on the CD or file.)

10. Knob & ENTER Button

• Turn this knob clockwise to browse songs after current song, or counterclockwise to browse songs before current song. To play the displayed song, press the knob.
• Pressing this knob without turning enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.

NOTE:

Order of playing files (folders) :

1. Song playing order : ① to sequentially.

2.Folder playing order :

* If no song file is contained in the folder, that folder is not displayed.

graph TD
    Root --> FolderA
    Root --> FolderAA
    Root --> FolderAB
    Root --> FolderABA
    FolderA --> 5
    FolderAA --> 6
    FolderAA --> 7
    FolderAB --> 3
    FolderAB --> 4
    FolderABA --> 8
    FolderAB --> 9
    FolderABB --> 6
    FolderB --> 1
    FolderB --> 2
    FolderBA --> 11
    FolderBA --> 12
    FolderBB --> 13
    FolderBB --> 14

graph LR
    Root --> FolderA
    FolderA --> FolderAA
    FolderAA --> FolderABA
    FolderABB --> FolderBA
    FolderBA --> FolderBB

FM/AM SAT CD/AUX ① POWER PUSH VOL ② ③ 1 2 3 4 SEEK TRACK SCAN MUTE ④

Using USB device

1. CD/AUX USB or AUX)

If the auxiliary device is connected, it switches to AUX or USB mode to play the sound from the auxiliary player.

If there is no auxiliary device, then the message "No Media" will become displayed on the LCD for 3 seconds and returns to previous mode.

2. 1 (RANDOM)

• Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to play songs randomly in current folder.
• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or longer to play songs randomly in entire USB device.
  • To cancel RANDOM play, press this button again.

3. 2 (REPEAT)

• Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to repeat current song.
• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or longer to repeat all songs in current folder.
• To cancel REPEAT, press this button again.

4. TRACK

- Press the i√TRACK less than 0.8 seconds to play from the beginning of the current song.

Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds and press it again within 1 second to move to and play the previous song.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds or longer to play the song in reverse direction in fast speed.

- Press the TRACK ∧ less than 0.8 seconds to move to the next song. Press the button for 0.8 seconds or longer to play the song in forward direction in fast speed.

DISP 6 INFO SETUP ENTER AUDIO PUSH 3 4 5 6 SCAN MUTE CAT FOLDER ⑤ FILE TUNE

5. SCAN

Plays each song in the USB device for 10 seconds.

To cancel SCAN Play, press this button again.

6. INFO

Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of FILE NAME → TITLE → ARTIST → ALBUM → FOLDER → TOTAL FILE → NORMAL DISPLAY → FILE NAME... (Displays no information if the file has no song information.)

DISP INFO SETUP ENTER AUDIO PUSH 3 4 5 6 SCAN MUTE √ CAT FOLDER ^ 7 FILE TUNE

7. FOLDER

- Press FOLDER move to child folder of the current folder and display the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move to the folder displayed. It will play the first song in the folder.

- Press FOLDER move to parent folder display the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to the folder displayed.

8. Knob & ENTER

- Turn this knob clockwise to browse songs after current song, or counter clockwise to browse songs before current song. To play the displayed song, press the knob.

- Pressing this knob without turning enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.

• When using an external USB device, make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle.
• If you start the engine when the USB device is connected, it may damage the USB device. (USB flashdrives are very sensitive to electric shock.) Connect the device after starting up.
• If the engine is started up or turned off while the external USB device is connected, the external USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or WMA files.
  1) It can only play MP3 files with the compression rate between 8Kbps\~320Kbps.
  2) It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps\~320Kbps.
  • Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of the external USB device, the connected external USB device can be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector setting of External USB device is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F authentication may not be recognizable.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short period of time, it may break the device.
• You may hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.

• If you disconnect the external USB device during playback in USB mode, the external USB device can be damaged or may malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device when the audio is turned off or in another mode. (e.g, Radio or CD)

• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of the files stored in the device, there is a difference in the time taken for recognition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music files.
• Playing videos through the USB is not supported.
• If you use devices such as a USB hub purchased separately, the vehicle's audio system may not recognize the USB device. In that case, connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.
  • Devices such as MP3 Player/Cellular phone/Digital camera can be unrecognizable by standard USB I/F can be unrecognizable.

- Charging through the USB may not be supported in some mobile devices.

* A car exclusive cable (Provided or sold separately) is required to use the iPod.

- Some non-standard USB devices (METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be unrecognizable.

- Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be unrecognizable.

- Music files protected by DRM (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.

- The data in the USB memory may be lost while using this audio. Always back up important data on a personal storage device.

CAUTION - USB jack damage

Please avoid using USB memory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack. Please make certain only to use plug type connector products as shown below.

FM/AM SAT CD/AUX ① POWER PUSH VOL ② ③ 1 2 3 4 SEEK TRACK SCAN MUTE ④

Using iPod®

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

1. CD/AUX iPod)

If iPod is connected, it switches to the iPod mode from the previous mode to play the song files stored in the iPod.

If there is no iPod connected, then it displays the message "No Media" for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.

2. 1 (RANDOM)

• Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to shuffle order of all songs in current category. (Song Random)
• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or longer to shuffle order of albums in current category. (Album Random)
  • To cancel RANDOM Play, press this button again.

3. 2 (REPEAT)

Repeats the song currently played.

4. TRACK

- Press the TRACK less than 0.8 seconds to play from the beginning of the song currently played.

Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds and press it again within 1 second to move to and play the previous track.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds or longer to play the song in reverse direction in fast speed.

- Press the TRACK less than 0.8 seconds to move to the next track.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds or longer to play the song in forward direction in fast speed.

DISP INFO SETUP ENTER AUDIO PUSH 3 4 5 6 SCAN MUTE CAT FOLDER FILE TUNE

5. SCAN

Plays each song in the USB device for 10 seconds.

To cancel SCAN Play, press this button again.

6. 6 (MENU)

Moves to the upper category from currently played category of the iPod.

To move to (play) the category (song) displayed, press TUNE

You will be able to search through the lower category of the selected category.

The standard order of iPod's category is SONGS → ALBUMS → ARTISTS → GENRES → iPod

DISP 8 INFO SETUP ENTER AUDIO PUSH 3 4 5 6 SCAN MUTE CAT FOLDER 7 FILE TUNE

7. Knob & ENTER

When you rotate the knob clockwise, it will display the songs (category) ahead of the song currently played (category in the same level).

Also, when you rotate the knob counterclockwise, it will display the songs (category) before the song currently played (category in the same level).

To listen to the song displayed in the song category, press the button to skip to and play the selected song.

Pressing the button changes the BASS, MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected is shown on the display. After selecting each mode, rotate the Audio control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

8. INFO

Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of

TITLE → ARTIST → ALBUM → NORMAL DISPLAY → TITLE... (Displays no information if the file has no song information.)

- Some iPod models might not support the communication protocol and the files will not be played. Supported iPod models:

• iPod Mini®
• iPod 4th(Photo) \~ 6th(Classic) generation
• iPod Nano® 1st\~4th generation

• iPod Touch® 1st\~2nd generation

• The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod can be different from the order searched in the audio system.

• If the iPod disabled due to its own malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset: Refer to iPod manual)
• An iPod may not operate normally on low battery.

• Some iPod devices, such as the iPhone, can be connected through the Bluetooth® wireless technology interface. The device must have audio Bluetooth® wireless technology capability (such as for stereo headphone Bluetooth® wireless technology). The device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.

• The Kia iPod Power Cable is needed in order to operate iPod with the audio buttons on the audio system. The USB cable provided by Apple may cause malfunction and should not be used for Kia vehicles.
  * The Kia iPod Power Cable may be purchased through your Kia Dealership.

• When connecting iPod with the iPod Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket completely. If not inserted completely, communications between iPod and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects of the iPod and the audio system, the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod when adjusting the audio system's volume, and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod.

• When the iPod cable is connected, the system can be switched to AUX mode even without iPod device and may cause noise. Disconnect the iPod cable when you are not using the iPod device.

• When not using iPod with car audio, detach the iPod cable from iPod. Otherwise, iPod may remain in accessory mode, and may not work properly.

• When connecting the iPod, use the USB/AUX terminals.
• When disconnecting the iPod, disconnect both the USB/AUX terminal.
• The iPod exclusive cable must be connected to both the USB/AUX terminals for iPod charging and operations to be supported.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio information (if equipped)

Satellite Radio channels:

SIRIUS Satellite Radio has over 130 channels, including 69 channels of 100% commercial-free music, plus sports, news, talk and entertainment available nationwide in your vehicle. For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels, visit sirius.com in the United States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance:

- Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

- Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

SIRIUS Satellite Radio service:

SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription-

based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:

• Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to SIRIUS music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:

Satellite Radio requires SIRIUS® compatible receiver and a subscription service fee after trial period.

Vehicles without a factory-installed radio receiver require hardware purchase and installation. Please see your dealer for further details. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions governed by the SIRIUS Terms & Conditions available at www.sirius.com / service terms.

Available only in the 48 contiguous United States and the District of Columbia. Service available in Canada; see www.siriuscanada.ca Kia shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12-digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to re-activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS.

FM/AM SAT ① CD/AUX POWER PUSH VOL 1 2 3 4 SEEK TRACK SCAN MUTE ② ③

Using SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3 month complimentary period of SIR-IUS Satellite Radio so you have access to over 130 channels of music, information, and entertainment programming.

Activation

In order to extend or reactivate your subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you will need to contact SIRIUS Customer Care at 1-888-539-7474. Have your 12 digit SID (Sirius Identification Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial Number) ready.

To retrieve the SID/ESN, turn on the radio, press the [SAT] button, and tune to channel zero.

Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activation signal.

1. SAT (SIRIUS Satellite Radio)

Press the SAT to switch to SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It cycles through the different bands as noted below.

SAT1→SAT2→SAT3→SAT1...

2. SEEK (CHANNEL)

• Press √SEEK ∧ for less than 0.8 seconds to select previous or next channel.
• Press SEEK 0.8 seconds or longer to continuously move to previous or next channel.
• If "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at the top of the screen, channel up/down is done through the channels within current category.

3. SCAN

• When the SCAN on is pressed, it automatically scans the radio stations upwards.
• The SCAN feature steps through every channel, starting from the initial channel, for ten seconds.
• Press the SCAN button again to stop the scan feature and to listen to the currently selected channel.
• If "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at the top of the screen, channel changing is done through the channels within current category.

1 2 3 4 5 6 ✓ SEEK TRACK ▲ SCAN MUTE ✓ CAT FOLDER ▲

4. CAT (CATEGORY)

• Press CAT to enter the Category List Mode. The display will indicate the category items, highlight the category that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press these buttons to navigate category list.
• Press ENTER to select the lowest channel in highlighted category.
• If channel is selected by selecting category "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at the top of the screen.

DISP 7 INFO SETUP ENTER AUDIO PUSH 3 4 5 6 SCAN MUTE CAT FOLDER 6 FILE TUNE

5. PRESET Buttons

• 1 6 buttons
than 0.8 seconds to play the channel saved in each button.
- 1 6 buttons
0.8 seconds or longer to save current channel to the respective button with a beep.

6. TUNE Button ENTER

• Rotate clockwise to increase the channel number or to scroll down the category list.
• Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the channel number or to scroll up the category list.

- Press this to make selection of channels or items.

7. INFO

Displays the information of the current channel as below when the button is pressed each time.

• When default display is CAT (Category) / CH (Channel) → Artist / Title → Composer (if available) → Category / Channel...
• When default display is ART (Artist) → TITLE (Title) → Category / Channel → Composer (if available) → Artist / Title...

for

\*Troubleshooting

1. Antenna Error If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult with your Kia dealership.
2. Acquiring Signal If this message is displayed, it means that the antenna is covered and that the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signal is not available. Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky.

BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY PHONE OPERATION

• Do not use a cellular phone or perform Bluetooth® wireless technology settings (e.g. pairing a phone) while driving.
• Some Bluetooth® wireless technology-enabled phones may not be recognized by the system or fully compatible with the system.
• Before using Bluetooth® wireless technology related features of the audio system, refer your phone's User's Manual for phone-side Bluetooth® wireless technology operations.
• The phone must be paired to the audio system to use Bluetooth® wireless technologyrelated features.

• You will not be able to use the hands-free feature when your phone (in the car) is outside of the cellular service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground, in a mountainous area, etc.).

• If the cellular phone signal is poor or the vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person's voice during a call.

• Do not place the phone near or inside metallic objects, otherwise communications with Bluetooth® wireless technology system or cellular service stations can be disturbed.
• While a phone is connected through Bluetooth® wireless technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for additional Bluetooth® wireless technology-related operations.
• Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference noise or malfunction to audio system. In this case, store the device in a different location may resolve the situation.
• Please save your phone name in English, or your phone name may not be displayed correctly.

If you need more information about Kia's Bluetooth® wireless technology. Contact kia website "www.kia.com" (OWNERS>General Info>Bluetooth® wireless technology).

Diagram of a car steering wheel with numbered parts for identification

(if equipped)

1. VOLUME : Raises or lowers speaker volume.

2. MUTE the microphone during a call.

3. ☐ ton : Activates voice recognition.

4. ☐ tton : Places and transfers calls.

5. button : Ends calls or cancels functions.

■ What is Bluetooth® wireless technology?

Bluetooth® wireless technology that allows multiple devices to be connected in a short range, low-powered devices like hands-free, stereo headset, steering remote control, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth® wireless technology website at www.Bluetooth.com

■ General Features

- This audio system supports Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled hands-free and stereo-headset features.

- HANDS-FREE feature: Making or receiving calls wirelessly through voice recognition.

- STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing music from cellular phones (that supports A2DP feature) wirelessly.

- Voice recognition engine of the Bluetooth® wireless technology system supports 3 types of languages:

- English

- Canadian French

- US Spanish

- The phone must be paired to the system before using Bluetooth® wireless technology features.

- Only one selected (linked) cellular phone can be used with the system at a time.

- Some phones are not fully compatible with this system.

■ Receiving a Phone Call

When receiving a phone call, a ring-tone is audible from speakers and the audio system changes into telephone mode.

When receiving a phone call, "Incoming call" message and incoming phone number (if available) are displayed on the audio.

• To Answer a Call:
- Press 📄 button on the steering wheel.
- To Reject a Call:
- Press button on the steering wheel.
• To Adjust Ring Volume:
- Use VOLUME buttons on the steering wheel.
• To Transfer a Call to the Phone (Private Call):
- Press and hold button on the steering wheel until the audio system transfers a call to the phone.

■ Talking on the Phone

When talking on the phone, "Active Call" message and the other party's phone number (if available) are displayed on the audio.

• To Finish a Call
• Press button on the steering wheel.

■ Bluetooth® wireless technology Audio Music Streaming

The audio system supports Bluetooth® wireless technology A2DP (Audio Advanced Distribution Profile) and AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) technologies.

Both profiles provide steaming of music via compatible "PAIRED" Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled Cellular phone.

To stream music from the Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled cellular phone, play your music files on your cellular phone according to your cellular phone user's manual and press the CD/AUX on the audio system until "MP3 play" is displayed on the LCD.

The audio system head unit displays 'MP3 MODE'.

NOTE:

• In addition to streaming MP3 files, all music and sound files your cellular phone supports can be played by the audio system.
• Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled compatible cellular phones must include A2DP and AVRCP capabilities.
• Some A2DP and AVRCP compatible Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled cellular phones may not play music through the audio system initially. These cellular phones may need to have the Bluetooth® wireless technology streaming enabled, for example;

i.e : Menu→Filemanager→Music→Option→Play via Bluetooth

- Please refer to User's Guide for your cellular phone for more information. To cancel Bluetooth® wireless technology cellular phone music streaming, stop music playback on the cellular phone or change the audio mode to AM/FM, SIRIUS, CD, iPod, ect.

■ Phone Setup

All Bluetooth® wireless technology related operations can be performed in PHONE menu.

1) Push the SETUP to enter SETUP mode.
2) Select "Phone" item by rotating the TUNE then push the knob.

SETUP 12:05 Phone Setting Main Media SAT P.Bass Phone Clock

3) Select desired item by rotating the TUNE knob, then push the knob.

PHONE 12:05 Pair Phone Pair Select Priority Delete Advanced ↻

- Pairing a phone

Before using Bluetooth ^® wireless technology features, the phone must be paired (registered) with the audio system. Up to 5 phones can be paired with the system.

NOTE:

• The pairing procedure of the phone varies according to each phone model. Before attempting to pair phone, please see your phone's User's Guide for instructions.
• Once pairing with the phone is completed, there is no need to pair with that phone again unless the phone is deleted manually from the audio system (refer "Deleting a Phone" section) or the vehicle's information is removed from the phone.

① Press SETUP button SETUP mode.
② Select "Phone", then "Pair" in PHONE menu.
③ The audio displays "Device : [Name] passkey: 0000"
④ Search and select the device name in your mobile phone to starting the pairing process.

NOTE:

- If the phone is paired with two or more vehicles of the same model, some phones may not handle Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled devices of that name correctly. In this case, you may need to change the name displayed on your phone.

For example, if the vehicles' name is KMC CAR, you may need to change the name displayed on you phone from KMC_CAR to JOHNS_CAR or KMC_CAR_1 to avoid ambiguity.

Refer to your phone User's Guide, or contact your cellular carrier or phone manufacturer for instructions.

to · Connecting a phone

When the Bluetooth ^® wireless technology system is enabled, the phone previously used is automatically selected and re-connected. If you want to select different phone previously paired, the phone can be selected through “Select Phone” menu.

Only a selected phone can be used with the hands-free system at a time.

① Press SETUP to enter SETUP mode.
② Select "Phone", then "Select" in PHONE menu.

SELECT 12:05 SCO-000 S P SCO-010 ----

③ Select desired phone name from the list shown.
④ The Bluetooth® wireless technology icon appears on the upper side of audio display when a phone is connected.

SELECT Connection Complete Phone Name

- Changing Priority

If several phones are paired with the audio system, the system attempts to connect following order when the Bluetooth® wireless technology system is enabled:

1) "Priority" checked phone.
2) Previously connected phone
3) Gives up auto connection.

① Press SETUP button to SETUP mode.
② Select "Phone", then "Priority" in PHONE menu.
③ Select desired phone name from the list shown.

PRIORITY 12:05 SCO-000 S P SCO-010 ----

- Deleting a Phone

The paired phone can be deleted.

• When the phone is deleted, all the information associated with that phone is also deleted (including phonebook).
• If you want to use the deleted phone with the audio system again, pairing procedure must be completed once more.

enter

① Press SETUP to enter SETUP mode.
② Select "Phone", then "Delete" in PHONE menu.
③ Select desired phone name from the list shown.

DELETE 12:05 SCO-000 SCO-010

• ADVANCED Menu

After pressing the SETUP, select the "Phone" menu. while in PHONE menu, select the "Advanced" menu to make Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled Phone settings. (The ADVANCED menu may differ according to audio specifications.)

ADVANCED 12:05 Incoming Volume In Vol. Contacts Language BT Off

Incoming Volume (Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled call volume adjustments)

While in ADVANCED menu, press "In. Vol" Use the knob key to set the desired volume and select the ENTER button.

Contacts Sync (Automatic Phonebook download setting)

While in Advanced menu, select "Contacts" To automatically save the contacts and call history in your mobile phone each time you connect a mobile device, select ON. If you do not wish for automatic download, select OFF.

It's not available to make a phone call by Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled audio system while the phonebook is being downloaded.

Language of Bluetooth® wireless technology voice recognition

While in ADVANCED menu, select "Language". To change the language, select the desired language and press the ENTER

Bluetooth® wireless technology system off

While in ADVANCED menu, select "BT Off" to turn off the Bluetooth® wireless technology System.

■ Voice Recognition Activation

• The voice recognition engine contained in the Bluetooth® wireless technology System can be activated in the following conditions:
• Button Activation

The voice recognition system will be active when the 📄 button is pressed and after the sound of a Beep.

- Active Listening

The voice recognition system will be active for a period of time when the Voice Recognition system has asked for a customer response.

• The system can recognize single digits from zero to nine while number greater than ten will not be recognized.
• The system shall cancel voice recognition mode in following cases: When pressing the ☐ ton and saying "cancel" following the beep. When not making a call and pressing the ☐ button. When voice recognition has failed 3 consecutive times.

- At any time if you say "help", the system will announce what commands are available.

■ Menu tree

The menu tree identifies available voice recognition Bluetooth ^® wireless technology functions.

graph TD
    A["Call [Name"] Ex) Call John (at Home)] --> B["Dial [Number"] Ex) Dial 911]
    B --> C["Call"]
    C --> D["By name"]
    C --> E["By number"]
    F["Redial"] --> G
    H["Call Back"] --> I
    J["Phonebook"] --> K["Add entry"]
    K --> L["By voice"]
    K --> M["By phone"]
    K --> N["Change name"]
    K --> O["Delete name"]

\*Tip

■ Voice Operation

To get the best performance out of the Voice Recognition System, observe the followings:

• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the window to eliminate surrounding noise (traffic noise, vibration sounds, etc), which may disturb recognizing the voice command correctly.
• Speak a command after a beep sound within 5 seconds. Otherwise the command will not be received properly.
• Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
• While receiving voice commands, press the button on the steering wheel remote controller to terminate guidance. Voice command will convert back to waiting mode to allow the user to say a new voice command.

■ Making a Phone Call

- Direct Calling

① Press 📊 button.
② Say the following command.

• Call : Connects the call to John.
• Call on Connects the call to John's mobile phone number.
• Call at : Connects the call to john's home number.
• Call in : Connects the call to John's office number.

Note:

Calls can be immediately connected to contacts who name or voice tag are saved in the phonebook(or contacts).

- Calling by Name

A phone call can be made by speaking names registered in the audio system.

① Press button.
② Say "Call".
③ Say "By name" when prompted.
④ Say desired name (in Phonebook or voice tag).
⑤ Say desired location (phone number type). Only stored locations can be selected.
⑥ Say "Yes" to confirm and make a call.

A shortcut to each of the following functions is available:

1. Say "Call Name"

• Dialing by Number

A phone call can be made by dialing the spoken numbers. The system can recognize single digits from zero to nine.

① Press button.

② Say "Call".

③ Say "By number" when prompted.

④ Say desired phone numbers.

⑤ Say "Dial" to complete the number and make a call.

A shortcut to each of the following functions is available:

① Say "Dial Number"

② Say "Dial "

■ Phone Book (In-Vehicle)

- Adding entry by voice

Phone numbers and voice tags can be registered. Entries registered in the phone can also be transferred.

① Press 📊 button.
② Say "Phonebook".

- The system replies with all available commands.

- To skip the information message, press again and then a beep is heard.

③ Say "Add Entry".
④ Say "By Voice" to proceed.
⑤ Say the name of the entry when prompted.
⑥ Say "Yes" to confirm.
⑦ Say the phone number of that entry when prompted.
⑧ Say "Store" if phone number input is finished.
⑨ Say a phone number type. "Home", "Work", "Mobile", "Other" or "Default" is available.
⑩ Say "Yes" to complete adding entry.

① Say "Yes" to store additional location for this contact, or say "Cancel" to finish the process.

- Adding Entry by Phone

① Press button.
② Say "Phonebook".
③ Say "Add Entry" after prompt.
④ Say "By Phone" to proceed.
⑤ Say "Yes" to confirm.
⑥ Your phone will start to transfer phone/contact list to the audio system.

This process may take over 10 minutes depending on the phone model and number of entries

⑦ Wait till the audio displays "Transfer Complete" message.

- Changing Name

The registered names can be modified.

① Press button.
② Say "Phonebook".
③ Say "Change Name" after prompt.
④ Say the name of the entry (voice tag).
⑤ Say "Yes" to confirm.
⑥ Say new desired name.

- Deleting Name

The registered names can be deleted.

① Press button.
② Say "Phonebook".
③ Say "Delete Name" after prompt.
④ Say the name of the entry (voice tag).
⑤ Say "Yes" to confirm.

■ Bluetooth® wireless Technology Audio Speaker Adaptation

Speaker adaptation will improve performance of voice recognition system to a particular user voice.

This will degrade the performance for other users.

- Record

① Press button for 10sec.
② Say "Record profile".
③ Say "Yes".
④ Say the word displayed on Radio.

- Delete

① Press button for 10sec.
② Say "Delete profile".
③ Say "Yes".

Before driving / 5-3

Key positions / 5-5

Engine start/stop button / 5-8

ISG (Idle stop and go) system / 5-13

Manual Transaxle / 5-17

Automatic transaxle / 5-20

Brake system / 5-25

Cruise control system / 5-37

Active eco system / 5-41

Economical operation / 5-42

Special driving conditions / 5-44

Driving your vehicle

5

Winter driving / 5-49

Trailer towing / 5-51

Vehicle load limit / 5-52

Vehicle weight / 5-57

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underside of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Engine exhaust

Do not inhale exhaust fumes or leave your engine running in a enclosed area for a prolonged time. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

WARNING

- Open tailgate

Do not drive with the tailgate open. Poisonous exhaust gases can enter the passenger compartment.

If you must drive with the tail-gate open proceed as follows:

1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at the highest speed.

BEFORE DRIVING

Before entering vehicle

• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis, with the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further details are provided in section 7, "Maintenance".

⚠ WARNING - Distracted driving

Focus on the road while driving. The driver's primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of the vehicle. Use of any handled devices, other equipment or vehicle systems that distract the drive should not be used during vehicle operation.

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.

⚠ WARNING - Check surrounding

Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before putting a car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING - Driving while intoxicated

Do not drive while intoxicated. Drinking and driving is dangerous. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous as or more dangerous than driving drunk.

WARNING - Fire risk

When you intend to park or stop the vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. It may overheat the engine or exhaust system and cause fire.

⚠ WARNING - Loose object

Securely store items in your vehicle. When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering wheel rapidly, loose objects may drop on the floor and it could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident.

KEY POSITIONS

Close-up of a circular industrial control knob with no visible text or symbols on the dial (pure technical diagram)

Ignition switch position

LOCK

The steering wheel locks to protect against theft. The ignition key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position.

The anti-theft steering column lock is not a substitute for the parking brake. Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in 1st gear for the manual transaxle or P (Park) for automatic transaxle, set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative. If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension.

ON

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. This is the normal running position after the engine is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge.

START

Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine. The engine will crank until you release the key; then it returns to the ON position. The brake warning light can be checked in this position.

⚠ WARNING - Ignition switch

Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is moving. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

⚠ WARNING - Steering wheel

Never reach for any controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle control.

Starting the engine

⚠ WARNING - Proper footwear

Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, sandals, etc.) may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal, and the clutch (if equipped).

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift the transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal and brake pedal depressed while turning the ignition switch to the start position. The starter will not operate if the clutch pedal is not fully depressed.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

1. Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.

2. In extremely cold weather (below -18^ / 0^ ) or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days, let the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without depressing the accelerator.

If the engine stalls while you are in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION - Starter

Do not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter. Improper use of the starter may damage it.

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

Close-up of a car's wheel with a circular indicator knob showing 'FNG' and 'STOP' (no text or symbols on the knob itself)

Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button

Whenever the front door is opened, the ENGINE START/STOP button will illuminate for your convenience. The light will go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed.

ENGINE START/STOP button position

OFF

Not illuminated

- With manual transaxle

To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle then press the ENGINE START/STOP button with the ENGINE START/STOP button ON.

- With automatic transaxle

To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position), press the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) position. When you press the ENGINE START/STOP button without the shift lever in the P (Park) position, the ENGINE START/STOP button will not change to the OFF position but to the ACC position.

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in P (Park), set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off.

In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion, you are able to turn the engine off and to the ACC position by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

ACC(Accessory)

Orange indicator

ON

Green indicator

START/RUN

Not illuminated

- With manual transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the clutch pedal.

- With automatic transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while it is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.

If the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position for more than 1 hour, the button will automatically turned off to prevent battery discharge.

- With manual transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button when the button is in the ACC position without depressing the clutch pedal.

- With automatic transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. Do not leave the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ON position without the engine running for an extended time because the battery may discharge.

- With manual transaxle

To start the engine, depress the clutch pedal and brake pedal, then press the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position.

- With automatic transaxle

To start the engine, depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the shift lever in the P (Park) or the N (Neutral) position. For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the clutch pedal on manual transaxle vehicles or without depressing the brake pedal on automatic transaxle vehicles, the engine will not start and the engine start/stop button changes as follows: OFF → ACC → ON → OFF

If you leave the ENGINE START/STOP button in the ACC or ON position for a long time, the battery will discharge.

WARNING - Starting vehicle

Never press the ENGINE START/STOP button while the vehicle is in motion. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

Starting the engine

1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.
   You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
5. In extremely cold weather (below -18^ / 0^ ) or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days, let the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator.
   Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without depressing the accelerator.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from you, the engine may not start.
- When the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position or above, if any door is opened, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, the "Indicator will blink or the warning "Key is not in vehicle" will illuminate on the LCD display. And if all doors are closed, the chime will sound for 5 seconds. The indicator or warning will turn off while the vehicle is moving. Always have the smart key with you.

The engine will start, only when the smart key is in the vehicle.

WARNING - Unintended vehicle movement

Never leave the smart key in the vehicle with children or vehicle occupants who are unfamiliar with the vehicle operation. Pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button while the smart key is in the vehicle may result in unintended engine activation and/or unintended vehicle movement.

If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If the traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and press the ENGINE START/STOP button in an attempt to restart the engine.

Interior view of a car showing airflow direction and a close-up of the handle (no text or symbols visible)

- If the battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by inserting the smart key in the smart key holder. When you pull out the smart key from the smart key holder, press the smart key and pull it out.

Driving your vehicle

- When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you can't start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new one. If it is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for 10 seconds while it is in the ACC position. The engine can start without depressing the brake pedal. But for your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the engine.

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown.

ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ISG system, which reduces fuel consumption by automatically shutting down the engine, when the vehicle is at a standstill. (For example: red light, stop sign and traffic jam)

The engine starts automatically as soon as the starting conditions are met.

The ISG system is ON whenever the engine is running.

\*NOTICE

When the engine automatically starts by the ISG system, some warning lights (ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking brake warning light) may turn on for a few seconds.

This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean the system is malfunctioning.

Type A x1000 rpm OAM052050

Type B MPN Auto Stop (A) 88:88 OAM052051N

Auto stop

To stop the engine in idle stop mode

Stop the vehicle completely by pressing the brake pedal.

You must reach a speed of at least 8 km/h (5 mph) since last idle stop.

The engine will stop and the green AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will illuminate.

If your vehicle is equipped with cluster type B, a message "Auto Stop" also will appear on the LCD display.

Interior view of a car showing a car's side panel with a highlighted compartment and a OAM 052053L label (no readable text or symbols beyond label)

Auto Start Deactivated Start Manually

OAM052059N

If you open the engine hood in auto stop mode, the ISG system will deactivate (the light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate). A message "Auto Start Deactivated Start Manually" will appear on the LCD display. (if equipped)

Turn the engine on manually.

Auto start

To restart the engine from idle stop mode

- Release the brake pedal.

or

- Move the shift gear to the R (Reverse) position or the sports mode while depressing the brake pedal.

The engine will start and the green AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will go out.

The engine will also restart automatically without the driver's any actions if the following occurs:

• When a certain amount of time has passed with the climate control system on.
• When the front defroster is on.
• The brake vaccum pressure is low.
• The battery charging status is low.
• The vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h (1 MPH).
• The fan speed is in the highest position when the air conditioning is on.
• Engine is turned off by Auto Stop for a long time.
• If you unfasten the seat belt or open the driver's door while depressing the brake pedal.

The green AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will blink for 5 seconds and a message "Auto Start" will appear on the LCD display (if equipped).

Condition of ISG system operation

The ISG system will operate under the following condition:

• The driver's seat belt is fastened.
• The driver's door and engine hood are closed.
• The brake vaccum pressure is adequate.
• The battery is sufficiently charged.
• The outside temperature is between -2°C to 35°C (28.4°F to 95°F).
• The engine coolant temperature is not low.

P Auto Stop Deactivated

OAM052055N OAI

(if equipped) Auto Stop OFF (A) OFF (A) (52053N)

ISG system deactivation

• If the ISG system does not meet the operation condition, the ISG system is deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and a message "Auto Stop Deactivated" will appear on the LCD display (if equipped).

• If the light or notice comes on continuously, please check the operation condition.

• If you want to deactivate the ISG system, press the ISG OFF button. The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and a message "Auto Stop off" will appear on the LCD display (if equipped).

• If you press the ISG OFF button again, the system will be activated and the light on the ISG OFF button will turn off.

ISG system malfunction

The system may not operate when:

- If the ISG related sensors or system error occurs, the yellow AUTO STOP indicator (A) on the instrument cluster will stay on after blinking for 5 seconds and the light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate.

- If the ISG OFF button light is not turned off by pressing the ISG OFF button again or if the ISG system continuously does not work correctly, please contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

⚠ WARNING - Engine repair

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (OFF) position or remove the key from the ignition completely before performing work on the vehicle in the engine area. Failure to do so could result in serious injuries due to sudden engine reactivation.

NOTICE

If the AGM battery is reconnected or replaced, ISG function will not operate immediately.

If you want to use the ISG function, the battery sensor needs to be calibrated for approximately 4 hours with the ignition off and then, turn the engine on and off 2 or 3 times.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

The shift lever can be moved without pulling the ring (1).

The ring (1) must be pulled up while moving the shift lever.

OAM052001

Manual transaxle operation

The manual transaxle has 6 forward gears.

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.

Depress the clutch pedal down fully while shifting, then release it slowly. If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition lock switch, the engine will not start when starting the engine without depressing the clutch pedal.

The shift lever must be returned to the neutral position before shifting into R (Reverse). The ring (1) located below the shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).

Never operate the engine with the tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

CAUTION - Downshifting

Do not downshift more than 2 gears or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such a downshifting may damage the engine.

• During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant is warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse), leave the shift lever at neutral position and release the clutch. Depress the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.

CAUTION - Premature wear

• Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to hold the vehicle stopped on an uphill or at a traffic light. This will result in premature clutch wear.
• Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

⚠ WARNING - Incline parking

Before leaving the driver's seat, always set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Then make sure the transaxle is shifted into 1st gear when the vehicle is parked on a level or uphill grade, and shifted into R (Reverse) on a downhill grade. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified.

Using the clutch

The clutch should be depressed all the way to the floor before shifting, then released slowly. The clutch pedal should always be fully released while driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor. Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives better acceleration when you need to increase your speed again. When the vehicle is traveling down steep hills, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill. This is extremely hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into reverse. The transaxle can be damaged if you do not.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.
  • Always buckle-up! In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

• Never exceed posted speed limits.

⚠ WARNING - Vehicle handling

Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning. High speed cornering and turning increases the risk of vehicle rollover due to loss of vehicle control. Rollover accidents are extremely violent and unpredictable.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

P R N D + - + - P R N D

Mechanical gear shift lever with yellow directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Depress the brake pedal and the push button when shifting.

Press the push button when shifting.

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

OAM052002

Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever.

NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been disconnected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the TCM (Transaxle Control Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control Module).

For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.

WARNING - Automatic transaxle

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position; then set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Do not use the P position in place of the parking brake. Always make sure the shift lever is latched in the P position and set the parking brake fully. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed.

CAUTION - Transaxle

• To avoid damage to your transaxle, do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on.
• The transaxle may be damaged if you shift into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.

When stopped on an upgrade, do not hold the vehicle with engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.

Transaxle ranges

The indicator light in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating.

Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

CAUTION - Shifting

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you may damage the transaxle if you shift into R (Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion, except when “Rocking the Vehicle” explained in this section.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving position. The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades, depress the accelerator fully, at which time the transaxle will automatically downshift to the next lower gear.

Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stopped or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a manual transaxle, the sports mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.

• In sports mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm approaches the red zone shift points are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever is operated.

- When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the +(up) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into the 2nd (or third) gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st gear.

Shift lock system

For your safety, the automatic transaxle has a shift lock system which prevents shifting the transaxle out of P (Park) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed and released with the shift lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering noise near the shift lever may be heard. This is a normal condition.

WARNING - Shifting from park

Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the P (Park) position into another position to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle.

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism with yellow directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Shift-lock override

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) into R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following:

1. Carefully remove the cap covering the shift-lock access hole.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the access hole and press down on the key (or screwdriver).
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer immediately.

Ignition key interlock system

The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged.
  • Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.

Moving up a steep grade from a standing start

To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the appropriate gear depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the service brakes.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

In the event that the power-assisted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason, you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

CAUTION - Brake pedal

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormally high brake temperatures which can cause excessive brake lining and pad wear.

⚠ WARNING - Steep hill braking

Avoid continuous application of the brakes when descending a long or steep hill by shifting to a lower gear. Continuous brake application will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

Wet brakes may impair the vehicle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way.

To dry the brakes, apply them lightly while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal.

In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion, you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater than normal.

⚠ WARNING - Parking brake

Avoid applying the parking brake to stop the vehicle while it is moving except in an emergency situation. Applying the parking brake while the vehicle is moving at normal speeds can cause a sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.

Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

CAUTION - Replace brake pads

Do not continue to drive with worn brake pads. Continuing to drive with worn brake pads can damage the braking system and result in costly brake repairs.

Always replace the front or rear brake pads as pairs.

WARNING - Brake wear

Do not ignore high pinched wear sounds from your brakes. If you ignore this audible warning, you will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a serious accident.

Rear drum brakes (if equipped)

Your rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators. Therefore, have the rear brake linings inspected if you hear a rubbing noise. Also have your rear brakes inspected each time you change or rotate your tires and when you have the front brakes replaced.

Close-up of a car's internal gear assembly (no text or symbols visible)

Parking brake

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then without pressing the release button in, pull the parking brake lever up as far as possible. In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on an incline, the shift lever should be in the P (Park) position for Automatic transaxle, or Reverse for manual transaxle.

CAUTION - Parking brake

Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.

Mechanical component diagram showing two directional arrows (① and ②) pointing to a curved internal structure, no text or symbols present.

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly. Secondly press the release button (1) and lower the parking brake lever (2) while holding the button.

⚠ WARNING - Parking brake use

All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

! (P) BRAKE

W-75

Check the brake warning light by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS (or ESC) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions.

The vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds in the following circumstances:

• When driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads
• When driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface heights.

Driving in these conditions increases the stopping distance for your vehicle.

The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels. If the wheels are going to lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a "tik-tik" sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Press your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the situation allows the ABS to control the force being delivered to the brakes.

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.
  • Always slow down when cornering. The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

ABS

W-78

The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS but your regular brakes will work normally. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

• When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and have operated your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull your car over to a safe place and stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light goes off, then your ABS is normal. Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

\*NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time. This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS has malfunctioned.

• Do not pump your brakes!
- Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

OFF OAM059006

Electronic stability control (ESC)

The Electronic Stability control (ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the brakes on individual wheels and intervenes with the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.

Electronic stability control (ESC) will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents.

Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding maneuvers that cause the vehicle to lose traction. Even with ESC installed, always follow all the normal precautions for driving - including driving at safe speeds for the conditions.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a "tik-tik" sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turned ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately 3 seconds, then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator will illuminate). To turn the ESC on, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine, you may hear a slight ticking sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system self-check and does not indicate a problem.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light blinks.

• When the Electronic Stability Control is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud or driving on a slippery road, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to increase.

ESC operation off

ESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is turned to LOCK position when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light

Indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the indicator light illuminates, then goes off if ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating and illuminates when ESC fails to operate.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your original tires.

⚠ WARNING - Electronic stability control

Drive carefully even though your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control. It can only assist you in maintaining control under certain circumstances.

ESC OFF usage

When driving

• It's a good idea to keep the ESC turned on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.

WARNING - Operating ESC

Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating (ESC indicator light blinks).

If ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may slip out of control.

Hill-start assist control (HAC) (if equipped)

Hill start Assist Control is a comfort function. The main intend is to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards while driving off uphill on an inclined surface. HAC holds the braking pressure builtup by driver during stopping procedure for 2 seconds after releasing brake pedal.

During the pressure-hold period, the driver has enough time to press the accelerator pedal to drive off.

The braking pressure is reduced as soon as the system detects the driver's intention to drive off.

WARNING - Rolling backward

Drivers should pay close attention when activating the HAC. The vehicle may roll backward causing an accident due to insufficient brake hold pressure.

• The HAC does not operate when the transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the ESC is off but it does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.

Vehicle stability management (VSM) (if equipped)

This system provides further enhancements to vehicle stability and steering responses when a vehicle is driving on a slippery road or a vehicle detected changes in coefficient of friction between right wheels and left wheels when braking.

VSM operation

When the VSM is in operation, ESC indicator light ( ) blinks.

When the vehicle stability management is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on bank road such as gradient or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light (icon) remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the instrument cluster

VSM operation off

If you press the ESC OFF button to turn off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illuminates.

To turn on the VSM, press the button again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes out.

Malfunction indicator

The VSM can be deactivated even if you don't cancel the VSM operation by pressing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that a malfunction has been detected somewhere in the Electric Power Steering system or VSM system. If the ESC indicator light (or EPS warning light remains on, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

- The VSM is designed to function above approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) on curves.

• The VSM is designed to function above approximately 30 km/h (18 mph) when a vehicle is braking on a split-mu road. The split-mu road is made of surfaces which have different friction forces.
• The Vehicle Stability Management system is not a substitute for safe driving practices but a supplementary function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. Always hold the steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate according to the driver's intention, even with installed VSM. Always follow all the normal precautions for driving at safe speeds for the conditions – including driving inclement weather and on a slippery road.

⚠ WARNING - Tire/wheel sizes

When replacing tires and wheels, make sure they are the same size as the original tires and wheels installed. Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may diminish any supplemental safety benefits of the VSM system.

Good braking practices

- Check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away. - Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet when the vehicle is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

- Don't coast down hills with the vehicle out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed.

- Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because the brakes might overheat and lose their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of the brake components.

- If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle, don't let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped.

• Be cautious when parking on a hill. Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.

• Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without pressing the accelerator pedal.

This system is designed to function above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

• If the cruise control is left on (CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminated), the cruise control can be switched on accidentally. Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator light OFF) when the cruise control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.

\*NOTICE

During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. The delay is normal.

WARNING - Misuse cruise control

Do not use cruise control if the traffic situation does not allow you to drive safely at a constant speed and with sufficient distance to the vehicle in front.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a close-up inset showing the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

To set cruise control speed:

1. Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button on the steering wheel, to turn the system on. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 40 km/h (25 mph).

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

1. Push the SET - switch, and release it at the desired speed. The SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. Release the accelerator at the same time. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going downhill.

To increase cruise control set speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the RES + switch and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release the switch at the speed you want.
• Push the RES+ switch and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) each time the RES+ switch is operated in this manner.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

To decrease the cruising speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the SET - switch and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the switch at the speed you want to maintain.
• Push the SET - switch and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) each time the SET - switch is operated in this manner.

To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

To cancel cruise control, do one of the following:

• Press the brake pedal.
• Press the clutch pedal with a manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic transaxle.
• Push the CANCEL switch located on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the memory speed by 20 km/h (12 mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, push the RES + switch located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed.

Interior view of a car steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 40 km/h (25 mph):

If any method other than the CRUISE ON-OFF switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when the RES+ switch is pushed.

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

To turn cruise control off, do one of the following:

• Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button (the CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.

Both of these actions will cancel the cruise control operation. If you want to resume the cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in "To set cruise control speed" on the previous page.

ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Type A Active ECO OAM052062 Type B Active ECO OAM052061L

Active ECO operation

Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency by controlling certain engine and transaxle system operating parameters. Fuel efficiency depends on the driver's driving habit and road condition.

• When the Active ECO button is pressed the ECO indicator (green) will illuminate to show that the Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated, it will remain on until the Active ECO button is pressed again. Active ECO does not turn off when the engine is restarted. To turn off Active ECO, press the Active ECO button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, the system will return to the normal mode.

Limitation of Active ECO operation:

If the following conditions occur while Active ECO is operating, the system operation is limited even though there is no change in the ECO indicator.

• When the coolant temperature is low: The system will be limited until engine performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill: The system will be limited to gain power when driving uphill because the engine torque is restricted.
• When using sports mode: The system will be limited according to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is deeply pressed for a few seconds: The system will be limited, judging that the driver wants to speed up.

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving, where you drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save money in both fuel and repairs:

- Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to the traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive the more fuel your vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate speed, in the highest gear appropriate for the conditions, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences.
  • Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your vehicle in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. If you drive your vehicle in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum service, your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the vehicle. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces fuel economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.

• Remember, your vehicle does not require extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in a very high gear resulting in engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speed.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset some of this loss, slow down when driving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, have an authorized Kia dealer perform scheduled inspections and maintenance.

⚠ WARNING - Engine off during motion

Never turn the engine off to coast down hills or anytime the vehicle is in motion. The power steering and power brakes will not function properly without the engine running. In addition, turning off the ignition while driving could engage the steering wheel lock resulting in loss of vehicle steering. Keep the engine on and downshift to an appropriate gear for engine braking effect.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle is stopped.

Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

WARNING - Downshifting Do not downshift with an automatic transaxle while driving on slippery surfaces. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid and result in an accident.

Reducing the risk of a rollover

This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Crossover Utility Vehicle (CUV). CUV's have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, which allows you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger vehicles. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. There are steps that a driver can make to reduce the risk of a rollover. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, do not load your roof rack with heavy cargo, and never modify your vehicle in any way.

WARNING - Rollover

Reduce speed when you turn corners. The center of gravity of Crossover Utility Vehicles (CUV) is higher than that of conventional vehicles, making them more likely to roll over when you turn corners too fast.

WARNING - Tire and wheel

Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to steering failure or rollover and serious injury. When replacing the tires, be sure to equip all four tires with the tire and wheel of the same size, type, tread, brand and load-carrying capacity.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between 1st (First) and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle. Do not race the engine, and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the transaxle.

The ESC system (if equipped) should be turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

CAUTION - Vehicle rocking

Prolonged rocking may cause engine overheating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.

CAUTION - Spinning tires

Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 56 km/h (35 mph). Spinning the wheels at high speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat which could result in tire damage.

WARNING - Sudden vehicle movement

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle if people or objects are nearby. The vehicle may suddenly move forward or backwards as it becomes unstuck.

Black-and-white illustration of a car driving on a mountain road with a speed limit sign (no text or symbols on the car or road)

M053010

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight, here are some important tips to remember:

- Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

- Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlights.

- Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night. Headlight operation when using windshield wipers is mandatory in some states.

- Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Black and white photo of a sedan driving under rain with cloud patterns (no text or symbols visible)

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous, especially if you're not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle, so slow down.

• Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. Be sure your tires are in good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.
  • If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure.

Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires.

⚠ WARNING - Under/over inflated tires

Always check the tires for proper inflation before driving. Underinflated or overinflated tires can cause poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. For proper tire pressures, refer to "Tires and wheels" in section 8.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both the engine coolant and engine oil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine.

WARNING - Tire tread

Always check the tire tread before driving your vehicle. Worn-out tires can result in loss of vehicle control. Worn-out tires should be replaced as soon as possible. For further information and tread limits, refer to "Tires and wheels" in section 7.

WINTER DRIVING

Illustration of a woman washing a car tire (no text or symbols visible)

Severe weather conditions in the winter result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize the problems of winter driving, you should follow these suggestions:

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicle's handling in all weather conditions. Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section 7. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized Kia dealer or a service station.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See section 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Check spark plugs and ignition system

Inspect your spark plugs as described in section 7 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an authorized Kia dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish.

Don't let your parking brake freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear shift lever in P (Park, automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the vehicle to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.

TRAILER TOWING

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

■ Type A

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEGEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY HOMME DE L'HALES TOTAL S FRONT AVANT 2 REAR AVANTER 365 kg o 840 kg The combined weight of occupants and carps should never exceed Le point total de occupant de la chargement et le total TIRE PNEU SIZE DIMENSIONS COLDTIRE PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS À FROID FRONT AVANT 235/45R18 23KPK, 33PSE REAR AVANTER 235/45R18 23KPK, 33PSE SPARE DE SECCOURS T125/60D16 420kPa, 60dpi SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION WOR LE MANUEL DE L'USAGER POUR PLUS DE RENSEGEMENTS

■ Type D

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RESENGIEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES AUANT ANNÉNE 34 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 200 kg or 849 kg. In possible total demand occupants at the charge will be sold upon addition. TIRE SIZE COLD/TIRE PRESSURE SEE OWNERS PNEU DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES MANUAL FOR FRONT AVIANT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION P255/4R118 23W/OA, 33PM VOR LE MANUEL REAR 23W/OA, 33PM FLOUR LE USAGER ANNÉNE SPARE NONE FIN DE RENSEIGNEMENTS DE SECOURS AUCTION

■ Type B

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSIGEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL 5 FRONT AVANT 2 REAR AVANTES 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo shall never exceed in parts total due occupants at the charge received or issued. Assumption 365 kg or 440 gm. TIRE PNEU SIZE DIMENSIONS COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS À FROID SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VOR LE MANUEL DE LA USDER POUR FLUER DE RENSIGEMENTS PNEU P050/50R16 230KPA, 30PB REAR ARBIERE P050/50R16 230KPA, 30PB SPARE DE SECOURS T125/RXD15 429kPa, 60pa

■ Type E

TRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RESEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL 5 FRONT AVANT 2 REAR AVENNE 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo never exceed in parts total due correspondents at the charge and will be present. Absorser Absoater 305 kg of 849 gm. TIRE PNEU SIZE OBSENSIONS COLD/TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION/DES PNEUS À FROID SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VOR LE MANUEL DE LA USAGER POUR PLUS DE RESEIGNEMENTS FRONT AVANT P205/SR16 230KPA, 33PEI REAR APPIERE P205/SR16 230KPA, 33PEI SPARE DE SECOURS NONE AUCUM

■ Type C

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SEATING CAPACITY NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL S FRONT AVANT REAR ARRIER 3 The conditioned weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 5 kg or 840 Bm. Le point total de occupants et du chargement sur dont jamais déprése 345 kg ou 840 Bm. TIRE PNEU SIZE DIMENSIONS COLD-TIME PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS A PROD SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VEIR LE MANUEL 30 L'ANNUIS POUR PLUS DE RENSEIGNEMENTS FRONT AVANT P195/6R15 230KPA, 33PSB P195/6R15 230KPA, 33PSB SPARE DE SECOURS T125/6X15 420KPa, 60ml

■ Type F

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RESENGEIGNETS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL 5 FRONT AVANT NEAR AVIÈRE 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed la poide total des occupants et du chargement et doul jamais déposser 285 kg or 840 gm. TIRE PNEU SIZE DIMENSIONS COLD/TIME PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS À FROED SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FRONT AVANT P195/6/15 230KPA, 33PSB REAR AVIÈRE P195/6/15 230KPA, 33PSB VOUR LE MANUEL 28 L'AMOUNT POUR PLUS DE RESENGEIGNETS SPARE DE SÉCOURS NONE AUCUM

OAM050200N/OAM050101L/OAM050102L OAM052201N/OAM052202N/OAM052203N

Tire and loading information label

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight:

385 kg (849 lbs.)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer, the combined weight includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity:

Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity:

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load, if your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg (1400 lbs.) and there will be five 68 kg (150 lbs.) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (650 lbs). (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or 1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Example 1

Vehicle Capacity - =

A
B
C

C190F01JM
Example 2

Vehicle Capacity - =

A
B
C
C190F02JM

Example 3

Vehicle Capacity - =

A
B
C
C190F03JM

Item	Description Total
A	Vehicle Capacity Weight (926 lbs)	420 kg
B W	Subtract Occupant Weight 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2	136 kg (300 lbs)
C	Available Cargo and Luggage weight (626 lbs)	284 kg

Item	Description Total
A	Vehicle Capacity Weight (926 lbs)	420 kg
B W	Subtract Occupant Weight 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5	340 kg (750 lbs)
C	Available Cargo and Luggage weight (1	80 kg (176 lbs)

Item	Description Total
A	Vehicle Capacity Weight (926 lbs)	420 kg
B W	Subtract Occupant Weight73 kg (161 lbs) × 5	365 kg(805 lbs)
C	Available Cargo and Luggage weight (1	55 kg21 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification label

The certification label is located on the driver's door sill at the center pillar.

This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

⚠ WARNING - Over loading

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight. Exceeding these ratings can affect your vehicle's handling and braking ability.

The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle - like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

WARNING - Over loading

Do not overload your vehicle. Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehicle's tires and possible tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling--all of which may result in a crash.

NOTICE

Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

⚠ WARNING - Loose cargo Do not travel with unsecured blunt objects in the passenger compartment of your vehicle (e.g. suit cases or unsecured child seats). These items may strike occupant during a sudden stop or crash.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's specifications and the certification label:

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle curb weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the certification label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver's door sill.

Road warning / 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving / 6-3

If the engine will not start / 6-4

Emergency starting / 6-4

If the engine overheats / 6-7

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-8

If you have a flat tire (with spare tire) / 6-13

If you have a flat tire (tire mobility kit) / 6-21

Towing / 6-27

What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

Interior view of a car dashboard with a yellow upward arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a car interior with a yellow arrow pointing to the dashboard area (no text or symbols visible)

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

If the engine stalls at a cross-road or crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, set the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe place.

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control. When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in P (Park, automatic transaxle) or reverse (manual transaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the car that is away from traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow the instruction provided later in this section.

If the engine stalls while driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, contact an authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

WARNING - Push/pull start

Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Push or pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to overload and create a fire hazard.

If engine turns over normally but does not start

1. Check the fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK position, check all connectors at the ignition coils and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call an authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

EMERGENCY STARTING

Jumper Cables 3 (-) 2 (+) Booster battery 4 (-) 1 (+) Discharged battery 1VQA4001

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow these jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle.

CAUTION - 12 volt battery

Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery

Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this may cause the battery to rupture or explode.

WARNING - Frozen batteries

Do not attempt to jump start the vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low as the battery may rupture or explode.

WARNING - Battery

Keep all flames or sparks away from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which will explode if exposed to flame or sparks.

WARNING - Sulfuric acid risk

When jump starting your vehicle be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the vehicle. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive.

Jump starting procedure

Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) batteries are maintenance-free and should only be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. For charging your AGM battery, use only fully automatic battery chargers that are specially developed for AGM batteries.

When replacing the AGM battery, use only the Kia genuine battery for the ISG system.

\*NOTICE

If the AGM battery is reconnected or replaced, ISG function will not operate immediately.

If you want to use the ISG function, the battery sensor needs to be calibrated for approximately 4 hours with the ignition off and then, turn the engine on and off 2 or 3 times.

WARNING - AGM battery cap

Do not open or remove the cap on top of the battery. This may cause the leak of dangerous internal electrolytes.

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-volt and that its negative terminal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to come in contact.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (1), then connect the other end to the positive terminal of the booster battery (2).
   Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery (4). Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

CAUTION - Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery. This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.

1. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Push-starting

Vehicles equipped with automatic transaxle and manual transaxle vehicles equipped with clutch lock system cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for jump-starting.

WARNING - Tow starting vehicle

Never tow a vehicle to start it because the sudden surge forward when the engine starts could cause a collision with the tow vehicle.

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine will probably be too hot. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park, automatic transaxle) or Neutral (manual transaxle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from underneath the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop).

⚠ WARNING - Under the hood

While the engine is running, keep hair, hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts.

1. If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

⚠ WARNING - Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.

1. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.
2. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.

Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)

Low tire pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure indicator do not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or engine is running, or if they remain illuminated after coming on for approximately 3 seconds, take your car to your nearest authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.

Low tire pressure tell-tale

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illuminated, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

If the telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver's side center pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire.

Then the TPMS malfunction indicator and the Low Tire Pressure telltale may turn on and illuminate after restarting and about 20 minutes of continuous driving before you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

In winter or cold weather, the low tire pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

WARNING

- Low pressure damage

Do not drive on low pressure tires. Significantly low tire pressure can cause the tires to overheat and fail making the vehicle unstable resulting in increased braking distances and a loss of vehicle control.

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator

The low tire pressure telltale will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. If the system is able to correctly detect an underinflation warning at the same time as system failure then it will illuminate both the TPMS malfunction and low tire pressure telltales e.g. if Front Left sensor fails, the TPMS malfunction indicator illuminates, but if the Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear Right tire is underinflated, the low tire pressure telltales may illuminate together with the TPMS malfunction indicator.

Have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible to determine the cause of the problem.

- The TPMS malfunction indicator may be illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cables or radios transmitter such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

- The TPMS malfunction indicator may be illuminated if snow chains are used or some separate electronic devices such as notebook computer, mobile charger, remote starter or navigation etc., are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

Changing a tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire Pressure telltale will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

CAUTION

Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by Kia to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. The tire sealant not approved by Kia may damage the tire pressure sensor. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel shall be eliminated when you replace the tire with a new one.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

Even if you replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure telltale will remain on until the low pressure tire is repaired and placed on the vehicle.

After you replace the low pressure tire with the new tire with TPMS, the TPMS malfunction indicator may illuminate after a few minutes because the TPMS sensor mounted on the spare wheel is not initiated.

Once the low pressure tire is reinflated to the recommended pressure and installed on the vehicle or the TPMS sensor mounted on the replaced spare wheel is initiated by an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tire pressure telltale will extinguish within a few minutes of driving.

If the indicator is not extinguished after a few minutes of driving, please visit an authorized Kia dealer.

If a original mounted tire is replaced with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor on the replaced spare wheel should be initiated and the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel should be deactivated. If the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel located in the spare tire carrier still activates, the tire pressure monitoring system may not operate properly. Have the tire with TPMS serviced or replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

You may not be able to identify a low tire by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure the tire's inflation pressure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold (from sitting stationary for at least 3 hours and driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile) during that 3 hour period).

Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to recommended pressure.

A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3 hour period.

• The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

\*NOTICE

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)

Close-up of mechanical parts including three wrenches and a tire component (no visible text or symbols)

Jack and tools

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment. Pull up the luggage box cover to reach this equipment.

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only.

To prevent the jack from "rattling" while the vehicle is in motion, store it properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing tires

Never attempt vehicle repairs in the traffic lanes of a public road or highway.

• Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tire. The jack should be used on a firm level ground. If you cannot find a firm, level place off the road, call a towing service company for assistance.
- Be sure to use the correct front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jacking support.

WARNING - Jack

Do not place any portion of your body under a vehicle that is only supported by a jack since the vehicle can easily roll off the jack. Use vehicle support stands.

• Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
  • Make sure any children present are in a secure place away from the road and from the vehicle to be raised with the jack.

WARNING

- Running vehicle on jack Do not start or run the engine of the vehicle while the vehicle is on the jack as this may cause the vehicle to fall off the jack.

Close-up of a car wheel assembly with a highlighted component (no visible text or symbols)

Removing and storing the spare tire

Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise.

Store the tire in the reverse order of removal.

To prevent the spare tire and tools from "rattling" while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

Black-and-white illustration of a person standing on a highway with a car, mountains in the background (no text or symbols)

Changing tires

1. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in R (Reverse) with manual transaxle or P (Park) with automatic transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-er.

Illustration of a silver minivan with a tire and suspension gear, shown in grayscale (no text or symbols)

1VQA4023 OAM069001

1. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tire from the vehicle.
2. Block both the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the jack position.

• To prevent vehicle movement while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.
• We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be blocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.
• To prevent vehicle movement while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.
• We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be blocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.

Close-up of a car wheel with numbered components and a yellow arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

1. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any nut until the tire has been raised off the ground.

Side view of a car with visible suspension components and two close-up insets showing mechanical assembly (no text or symbols)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car wheel and a tool with a yellow circular component (no text or symbols)

1. Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position closest to the tire you are changing. Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame.
2. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire just clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 30 mm (1 in.). Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for movement or slippage.
3. Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can slide over the other studs.

Wheels may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that prevents with the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub.

WARNING - Installing a wheel

Make sure the wheel makes good contact with the hub when installed. If the contact of the mounting surface between the wheel and hub is not good, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle.

1. To install the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.

2. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise.

Close-up of a car wheel with numbered components and a yellow arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening every nut following the numerical sequence shown in the image until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, have an authorized Kia dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

9\~11 kg·m (65\~79 lb·ft)

If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, dust and dirt may get into the tire valve and air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible.

After you have changed the wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

CAUTION - Reducing lug nuts

Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used. Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts. Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

⚠ WARNING - Wheel studs Do not drive your vehicle with damaged wheel studs. If the studs are damaged, they may lose their ability to retain the wheel. This could lead to the loss of the wheel and a collision.

To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.

Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to "Tires and wheels" in section 8.

Important - use of compact spare tire (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a conventional tire and is designed for temporary use only.

• You should drive carefully when the compact spare is in use. The compact spare should be replaced by the proper conventional tire and rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle is not recommended with more than one compact spare tire in use at the same time.

WARNING - Spare tire

Do not operate your vehicle on this compact spare at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). The compact spare tire is for emergency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced as soon as is possible to avoid failure of the spare.

The compact spare should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).

Check the inflation pressure after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire, observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances should you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a higher speed could damage the tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards. Any road hazard, such as a pothole or debris, could seriously damage the compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire could result in tire failure, loss of vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle's maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 25 mm (1 inch), which could result in damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire's tread life is shorter than a regular tire. Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.

• The compact spare tire should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other car components may occur.

• Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)

Interior view of a vehicle showing a battery pack and a cylindrical component with coiled cable, no visible text or symbols.

For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use.

(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle

The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tire and the tire should be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION - One sealant for one tire

When two or more tires are flat, do not use the tire mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tire.

WARNING - Tire wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tire walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure.

WARNING - Temporary fix

Have your tire repaired as soon as possible. The tire may loose air pressure at any time after inflating with the Tire Mobility Kit.

Close-up of a car tire being installed with a pressure relief device (no visible text or symbols)

Introduction

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tire puncture.

The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tire caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tire.

After you ensured that the tire is properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (distance up to 200 km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of (80 km/h) in order to reach a service station or tire dealer for the tire replacement.

It is possible that some tires, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely.

Air pressure loss in the tire may adversely affect tire performance.

For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.

The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tire repair method and is to be used for one tire only.

This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the road so that you can work with the Tire Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tires. Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tire can be sealed using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are damaged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not be effective for tire damage larger than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in). Please contact the nearest Kia dealership if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the Tire Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a tire is severely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pressure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below -30°C (-22°F).

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 OAM060015L

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

1. Speed restriction label

2. Sealant bottle and label with speed restriction

3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel

4. Connectors and cable for the power outlet direct connection

5. Holder for the sealant bottle

6. Compressor

7. On/off switch

8. Pressure gauge for displaying the tire inflation pressure

9. Screw cap for reducing tire inflation pressure

10. Hose to connect compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and wheel

Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

WARNING - Expired sealant

Do not use the Tire sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e. pasted the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING - Sealant

• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.

Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.

Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1. Detach the speed restriction label (0) from the sealant bottle (1), and place it in a highly visible place inside the vehicle such as on the steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.

2. Screw connection hose (9) onto the connector of the sealant bottle.

3. Ensure that screw cap (8) is closed.

4. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing (4) of the compressor so that the bottle is upright.

Close-up of a car tire being installed with pressure pump and fuel tank (no visible text or symbols)

1. Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position 0.

2. Plug the compressor power cord into the vehicle power outlet.

3. With the engine start/stop button position on or ignition switch position on, switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 5\~7 minutes to fill the sealant up to proper pressure. (refer to the Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling is unimportant and will be checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the tire and stay away from the tire when filling it.

CAUTION - Tire pressure

Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tire pressure is below 200kpa (29 PSI). This could result in an accident due to sudden tire failure.

1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle connector and from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.

WARNING - Carbon monoxide

Do not leave your vehicle running in a poorly ventilated area for extended periods of time. Carbon monoxide poisoning and suffocation can occur.

Distributing the sealant

1. Immediately drive approximately 7\~10km (4\~6miles or, about 10min) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).

While driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing. When you use the Tire Mobility Kit, the tire pressure sensors and wheel may be damaged by sealant, remove the sealant stained with tire pressure sensors and wheel and inspect in authorized dealer.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

1. After driving approximately 7\~10km (4 \~ 6miles or about 10min), stop at a safety location.

2. Connect connection hose (9) of the compressor directly to the tire valve.

3. Plug the compressor power cord into the vehicle power outlet.

4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the recommended tire inflation. With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pressure: Switch on the compressor, position I. To check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.

\*NOTICE

The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the compressor is running. To get an accurate tire pressure, the compressor needs to be turned off.

- To reduce the inflation pressure: Loosen the screw cap (8) on the compressor hose.

CAUTION - Tire pressure sensor

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit including sealant not approved by Kia, the tire pressure sensors may be damaged by sealant. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel should be removed when you replace the tire with a new one and inspect the tire pressure sensors in authorized dealer.

Technical Data

System voltage: DC 12 V

Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V

Amperage rating: max. 15 A

Suitable for use at temperatures: -30 \~ +70°C (-22 \~ +158°F)

Max. working pressure: 6 bar (87 psi)

Size

Compressor: 168 x 150 x 68 mm (6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.)

Sealant bottle: 104 x ø 85 mm (4.1 x ø 3.3 in.)

Compressor weight: 1.05 kg (2.31 lbs)

Sealant volume: 300 ml (18.3 cu. in.)

TOWING

Three grayscale illustrations of a car on a flatbed trailer, showing different scenarios: ramp-up, off-road ramp, and off-road ramp (no text or symbols)

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

For trailer towing guidelines information, refer to "Trailer towing" in section 5.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

OPA067017 OPA067016

CAUTION - Towing

• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION - Towing gear position

Always place the transaxle shift lever in Neutral (N) when towing your vehicle. Failure to place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a specific part (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted section and arrow indicating a detail (no text or symbols present)

OAM062010 OAM062011

Removable towing hook (front) (if equipped)

1. Remove the towing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the front bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

Front Rear (if equipped) OAM062011 OAM069012L

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front (or rear) of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing.
  • The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.

• Attach a towing strap to the tow hook.
  • Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your vehicle.

• Only use a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.
• Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadily and with even force.
  • To avoid damaging the hook, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

Top-down diagram showing three vehicle types: a pickup truck, a small car, and a two-story car with a cargo truck (no text or symbols)

OPA067014

• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loose during towing.

Emergency towing precautions

• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the steering wheel isn't locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force than usual since you will have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often and let the brakes cool off.
• If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes.

⚠️ CAUTION - Automatic transaxle

• To avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle, limit the vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph) and drive less than 1.5 km (1 mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be used.

What to do in an emergency

Top-down view of a gray car with four wheels and a yellow arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing, if equipped)

CAUTION - Tie-down hooks

Do not use the hooks under the rear of the vehicle for towing purposes. These hooks are designed ONLY for transport tie-down. If the tie-down hooks are used for towing, the tie-down hooks or rear bumper will be damaged.

Engine compartment / 7-2

Maintenance services / 7-4

Owner maintenance / 7-6

Scheduled maintenance service / 7-8

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-22

Engine oil / 7-26

Engine coolant / 7-28

Brake/clutch fluid / 7-31

Washer fluid / 7-32

Parking brake / 7-33

Air cleaner / 7-34

Wiper blades / 7-35

Battery / 7-38

Tires and wheels / 7-41

Fuses / 7-54

Appearance care / 7-66

Maintenance

Emission control system / 7-72

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1.6L

Technical diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components for identification

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Radiator cap
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Negative battery terminal
9. Fuse box
10. Air cleaner
    * if equipped

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OAM012003

2.0L

Technical diagram of a car engine bay with numbered components for identification

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Radiator cap
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Negative battery terminal
9. Fuse box
10. Air cleaner
    * if equipped

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OAM072100L

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have an authorized Kia dealer perform this work.

An authorized Kia dealer has factory trained technicians and genuine Kia parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Kia dealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.

Owner's responsibility

NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record Retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty & Consumer Information manual.

Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. An authorized Kia dealer meets Kia's high service quality standards and receives technical support from Kia in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an authorized Kia dealer with special tools.

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Warranty & Consumer Information manual provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING

- Maintenance work

Do not wear jewelry or loose clothing while working under the hood of your vehicle with the engine running. These can become entangled in moving parts, if you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fans.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING - Hot coolant

Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or "pulls" to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P (Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check the radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check the windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean the wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year:

• Clean the body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and checks, and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate the automatic transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow the Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.
- Driving in dusty conditions or sandy areas.
- Extensive use of brakes.
- Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used.
- Driving on rough or muddy roads.
- Driving in mountainous areas.
- Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
- Driving for a prolonged period in cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.
- More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 32°C (90°F).

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After 120 months or 240,000 km continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

*1 Inspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or timing belt.
*2 Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.
*3 Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
*4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

*5 When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*6 If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

12,000 km or 6 months

□Inspect air cleaner filter
Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□Inspect cooling system * 1
□Inspect drive shaft and boots
□Inspect visually the following items.

1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

□Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

□Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

24,000 km or 12 months

□Inspect air cleaner filter
☐Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□Inspect cooling system * 1
□Inspect drive shaft and boots
□Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

☐Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

□Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

(Continued)

(Continued)

□Add fuel additive * 6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

48,000 km or 24 months

☐Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)

□Inspect cooling system * 1

□Inspect drive shaft and boots

□Inspect fuel filter * 2

□Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

□Inspect fuel tank air filter * 2

☐Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 60,000 km or 48 months)

Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

☐Inspect visually the following items 1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

3) Brake lines, hoses and connections

4) Brake pedal and operation

5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts

6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)

7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler

9) Front suspension ball joints

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges

(Continued)

(Continued)

12) Parking brakes

13) Steering operation and linkage

14) Suspension mounting bolts

□Replace air cleaner filter

☐Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

□Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

□Add fuel additive * 6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

72,000 km or 36 months

□Inspect air cleaner filter
☐Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□Inspect cooling system * 1
□Inspect drive shaft and boots
□Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
☐Add fuel additive * 6(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

96,000 km or 48 months

☐Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)

□Inspect cooling system * 1

☐Inspect drive belt * 4 (First, 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)

□Inspect drive shaft and boots

□Inspect fuel filter * 2

□Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

□Inspect fuel tank air filter * 2

□Inspect valve clearance (Engine 1.6) * 3

☐Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

□Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

(Continued)

(Continued)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

□Replace air cleaner filter

☐Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

☐Replace engine oil and filter (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

☐Add fuel additive *6 (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

120,000 km or 60 months

□Inspect air cleaner filter
☐Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□Inspect cooling system * 1
☐Inspect drive belt * 4 (First 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
□Inspect drive shaft and boots
☐Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 60,000 km or 48 months)
□Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

(Continued)

(Continued)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

☐Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

□Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

□Add fuel additive *6

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

144,000 km or 72 months

☐Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□Inspect cooling system * 1
☐Inspect drive belt * 4 (First 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
□Inspect drive shaft and boots
□Inspect fuel filter * 2
□Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection
Inspect fuel tank air filter * 2
□Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
□Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

(Continued)

(Continued)

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

□Replace air cleaner filter
☐Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
☐Replace engine oil and filter (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * 6 (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

168,000 km or 84 months

□Inspect air cleaner filter
Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□Inspect cooling system * 1
☐Inspect drive belt * 4 (First 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)
□Inspect drive shaft and boots
☐Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 60,000 km or 48 months)
□Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses

(Continued)

(Continued)

11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

☐Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
□Replace engine oil and filter
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
□Add fuel additive * 6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
☐Replace spark plugs (iridium coated),
☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

192,000 km or 96 months

☐Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)

□Inspect cooling system * 1

☐Inspect drive belt * 4 (First 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)

□Inspect drive shaft and boots

□Inspect fuel filter * 2

☐Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

□Inspect fuel tank air filter * 2

☐Inspect valve clearance (Engine 1.6) * 3

☐Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

□Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints

(Continued)

(Continued)

10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

□Replace air cleaner filter

☐Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

☐Replace engine coolant ^*5

(First, 192,000 km or 120 months after every 48,000 km or 24 months)

□Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

☐Add fuel additive * 6 (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

216,000 km or 108 months

□Inspect air cleaner filter
☐Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)
□Inspect cooling system * 1
□Inspect drive belt * 4

(First 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)

□Inspect drive shaft and boots
□Inspect visually the following items

1) Battery condition
2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)
8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

(Continued)

(Continued)

☐Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
☐Replace engine oil and filter (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
☐ Add fuel additive * 6 (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)

240,000 km or 120 months

☐Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance (if equipped)

□Inspect cooling system * 1

☐Inspect drive belt * 4 (First 96,000 km or 72 months after every 24,000 km or 24 months)

□Inspect drive shaft and boots

□Inspect fuel filter * 2

☐Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection

□Inspect fuel tank air filter * 2

☐Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 60,000 km or 48 months)

☐Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

☐Inspect visually the following items 1) Battery condition

2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid
3) Brake lines, hoses and connections
4) Brake pedal and operation
5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts
6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped)
7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped)

(Continued)

(Continued)

8) Exhaust pipe and muffler
9) Front suspension ball joints
10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses
11) Lubricate all locks and hinges
12) Parking brakes
13) Steering operation and linkage
14) Suspension mounting bolts

□Replace air cleaner filter
☐Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
□Replace engine coolant * 5

(First 192,000 km or 120 months after every 48,000 km or 24 months)

□Replace engine oil and filter

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

□Add fuel additive * 6
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)
☐Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear
(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

No check, No service required

□Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM	MAINTENANCE OPERATION	MAINTENANCE INTERVALS	DRIVING CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER	R	EVERY 6,000 km OR 6 months	A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER	R	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, E
SPARK PLUGS	R	MORE FREQUENTLY	A, B, H, I, K
DISC BRAKE/ PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS	I	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/ LININGS, PARKING BRAKE	I	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BSALL JOINT	I	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, D, E, F, G, H, I
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS	I	EVERY 12,000 km OR 6 months	C, D, E, F, G, H
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL	R	EVERY 120,000 km	A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID	R	EVERY 90,000 km	A, C, E, F, G, H, I
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)	R	MORE FREQUENTLY	C, E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving shorts distance of less than 8 km in normal temperature or less than 16 km in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing J - Driving over 170 km/h
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.

Fuel filter (cartridge)

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause multiple issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections. Fuel filters should be installed by an authorized Kia dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized Kia dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.

Valve clearance (for 1.6 Engine)

Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. An authorized Kia dealer should perform the operation.

Cooling system

Check the cooling system components, such as the radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Inspect the manual transaxle fluid according to the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

Automatic transaxle fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions.

But in severe conditions, the fluid should be changed at an authorized Kia dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this section.

NOTICE

Automatic transaxle fluid color is basically red.

As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.

It is normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color.

The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.

Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid. (Refer to

"Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake/Clutch (if equipped) fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake pedal and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

Rear brake drums and linings (if equipped)

Check the rear brake drums and linings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts, and excessive wear.

Exhaust pipe and muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.

ENGINE OIL

Engine 1.6 OAM072001 Engine 2.0 OAM072101L

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.

CAUTION - Replace engine oil

Do not overfill the engine oil. Engine damage may result.

Engine 1.6 GDI OAM072003 Engine 2.0 OAM072102L

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

Changing the engine oil and filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.

WARNING

Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

ENGINE COOLANT

,The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder climate.

WARNING - Cooling fan Use caution when working near the blade of the cooling fan. The electric motor (cooling fan) is controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pres- sure and vehicle speed. It may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running.

Close-up of a car's front bumper with a yellow arrow pointing to the nose area (no text or symbols visible)

Checking the coolant level

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between F and L marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough distilled (deionized) water to provide protection against freezing and corrosion. Bring the level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required, see an authorized Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory.
  An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.

Ambient Temperature	Mixture Percentage (volume)
	Antifreeze	Water
-15°C (5°F) 35	65
-25°C (-13°F)	40 60
-35°C (-31°F)	50 50
-45°C (-49°F)	60 40

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a circular component (no visible text or symbols)

WARNING - Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam

may blow out under pressure causing serious injury.

CAUTION - Removing radiator cap

Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead

to cooling system and engine damage.

Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

Changing the coolant

Have the coolant changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.

Put a thick cloth around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as the alternator.

BRAKE/CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID

Close-up of a mechanical component with a yellow arrow pointing to a component, no visible text or symbols.

Checking the brake/clutch\* fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch* fluid contamination.

* if equipped

CAUTION - Proper fluid

Only use brake/clutch fluid in brake/clutch system. Small amounts of improper fluids (such as engine oil) can cause damage to the brake/clutch system.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings and/or clutch disc (if equipped). If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake/clutch* system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch* fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities" in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

In the event the brake/clutch* system requires frequent additions of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

When changing and adding brake/clutch* fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake/clutch* fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Brake/clutch fluid

Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.

Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.

WASHER FLUID

Close-up of a mechanical engine component with a yellow arrow pointing to a component (no visible text or symbols)

Checking the washer fluid level

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

⚠ WARNING - Windshield fluid

Do not drink the windshield washer fluid. The windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals.

WARNING - Flammable fluid

Do not allow the washer fluid to come in contact with open flames or sparks. The windshield washer fluid clan is flammable under certain circumstances. This can result in a fire.

PARKING BRAKE

Close-up of a car interior showing internal compartments and connectors (no visible text or symbols)

If the stroke is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized Kia dealer.

Stroke : 5\~7 "clicks" at a force of 20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of "clicks" heard while fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade.

AIR CLEANER

ALABE ENSIDE METER 20.00 OAM079043

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary, and should not be washed.

You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element.

Clean the filter by using compressed air.

Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals. (Refer to "Maintenance under severe usage conditions" in this section.)

CAUTION - Air filter maintenance

• Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.

WIPER BLADES

Diagram of a car showing front and side views with abstract white patterns on the windshield (no text or symbols)

Blade inspection

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.

CAUTION - Wiper blades

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

Maintenance

Diagram of a mechanical or aerial component with curved arrows indicating motion, no visible text or symbols

Close-up of a hand holding a thin wire with yellow arrows indicating cutting or dissection (no text or symbols)

Close-up of a hand holding a metal clamp or wire, no visible text or symbols

Front windshield wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the blade assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

CAUTION - Wiper arms

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a pin or lever mechanism with a yellow arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the wiper blade assembly.

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with a highlighted section and label 'OED076041' (no readable text or symbols beyond label)

1. Install the new blade assembly by inserting the center part into the slot in the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
2. Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.
3. Place back the wiper arm to the proper position.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized Kia dealer replace the wiper blade.

BATTERY

Close-up of a car battery panel with warning labels and a yellow arrow pointing to a component (no readable text or symbols)

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.

⚠ WARNING - Risk of explosion

Keep lit cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery.

The battery contains hydrogen - a highly combustible gas, which will explode if it comes in contact with a flame or spark.

WARNING - Sulfuric acid in batteries

Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries contain highly corrosive SULFURIC ACID and electrolytes. Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish.

Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery. Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space.

Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery.

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

The battery contains lead. Do not dispose of it after use. Please return the battery to an authorized Kia dealer to be recycled.

⚠ WARNING - Recharging battery

Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.

When you don't use the vehicle for a long time in the low temperature area, separate the battery and keep it indoors.

⚠ WARNING - Risk of electrocution

Never touch the electrical ignition system while the vehicle is running. This system works with high voltage which can "zap" you.

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery.

- If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights were left on while the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.

- If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

When recharging the battery, observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.
• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 49^ (120^) .
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

• Turn off the battery charger main switch.

• Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.
• Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.

- Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine.

- The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected.

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.

• Sunroof (See section 4)
  • Climate control system (See section 4)
  • Clock (See section 4, Audio)
  • Audio (See section 4)

TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures

All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. "Cold Tires" means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1.6 km (one mile).

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressure, refer to "Tire and wheels" in section 8.

Close-up of a car interior showing a rectangular component with a dotted circle highlighting a specific area (no text or symbols visible)

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the driver's side center pillar.

WARNING - Tire under inflation

Inflate your tires consistent with the instructions provided in this manual. Severe underinflation can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

• Underinflation also results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
  • Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

Maintenance

• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

Always observe the following:

• Check tire pressure when the tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than 1.6 km (one mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Check your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to check

Use a good quality gage to check tire pressure. You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

• Inspect your tires frequently for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire. Kia recommends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.

Tire rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to "Tire and wheels" in section 8.

Without a spare tire

graph TD
    A["Input Block 1"] --> B["Output Block 1"]
    C["Input Block 2"] --> D["Output Block 2"]
    E["Feedback Loop"] --> A
    E --> C
    F["Feedback Loop"] --> C

S2BLA790A

Directional tires (if equipped)

graph TD
    A[" "] <--> B[" "]
    C[" "] <--> D[" "]

CBGQ0707A

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

Rotate radial tires that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left. Do not use the compact spare tire (if equipped) for tire rotation.

⚠ WARNING - Mixing tire types

Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics.

Wheel alignment and tire balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

CAUTION - Wheel weight

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

Tread wear indicator OEN076053

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tire.

- The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. The tire size affects wheel speed. When replacing tires, all 4 tires must use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS(Antilock Brake System) and ESC(Electronic Stability Control) to work irregularly.

Compact spare tire replacement

A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire. Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire. The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height.

CAUTION - Wheel

Wheels that do not meet Kia's specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle or unusual handling and poor vehicle control.

Tire traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. Slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road to reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

1 5,6 7 4 3 2 NAME OF TIRE 1 I030B04JM

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

2. Tire size designation

A tire's sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tires for your vehicle. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.)

P245/70R17 108T

P - Applicable vehicle type (tires marked with the prefix "P" are intended for use on passenger vehicles or light trucks; however, not all tires have this marking).

245 - Tire width in millimeters.

70 - Aspect ratio. The tire's section height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

108 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:

7.0JX17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed Rating Symbol	Maximum Speed
S	180 km/h (112 mph)
T	190 km/h (118 mph)
H	210 km/h (130 mph)
V	240 km/h (149 mph)
Z	Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date, (including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1611 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2011.

WARNING - Tire age

Replace tires within the recommended time frame. Failure to replace tires as recommended can result in sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an accident.

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tires. The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be replaced after approximately six(6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire terminology and definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per square inch (psi).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transaxle, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per square inch (psi) before a tire has built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg (150 pounds).

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars," that show across the tread of a tire when only 2/32 inch of tread remains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.

All season tires

Kia specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

Kia specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. if you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions. Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.

Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 psi) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver's side of the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75 mph) when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires.

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction, and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle. Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size, and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical radial-ply tires should always be used as a set of four.

Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval shown in this section to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.

FUSES

Blade type

Normal

Blown

Cartridge type

Normal

Blown

Multi fuse

Normal Blown

OBK079042

A vehicle's electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one located in the driver's side panel bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle's lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will melt.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver's side fuse panel.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

WARNING - Fuse replacement

• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.
  • A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire.

CAUTION - Fuse replacement

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

Close-up of a car interior showing a yellow arrow pointing to a valve or adjustment, with no visible text or symbols.

Inner panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.

Architectural site plan with labeled building layouts and a yellow arrow indicating a specific area of interest.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.

OAM079047OAM079020

1. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided on the fuse panel cover.
2. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown.

Spare fuses are provided in the instrument panel fuse panel (or in the engine compartment fuse panel).

1. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Maintenance

Interior view of a server rack with labeled ports and a yellow arrow pointing to a specific panel (no readable text or symbols)

OAM079022 OAM072023 devices.

- If the memory fuse is pulled out from the fuse panel, the warning chime, audio, clock and interior lamps, etc., will not operate. Some items must be reset after replacement. Refer to "Battery" in this section.

• Even when the memory fuse is pulled out, the battery can still be discharged by operation of the headlights or other electrical

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with a memory fuse to prevent battery discharge if your vehicle is parked without being operated for prolonged periods. Use the following procedures before parking the vehicle for prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver's side panel cover and pull out the memory fuse.

Interior view of a car showing battery pack and engine compartment (no visible text or symbols)

Engine compartment fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.

2. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling the cover up.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

CAUTION - Fuse panel covers

After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover to prevent electrical failures which may occur from water contact.

Close-up of electronic components with metallic fittings and connectors (no visible text or symbols)

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel on the right side in the engine compartment.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

If the multi fuse is blown, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

Interior view of a car showing the door panel and internal wiring connector (no text or symbols visible)

Fuse/relay panel description

Inner fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

DR LOCK 20A A/BAG 15A P/WDW LH 25A AMP 25A STOP LP 15A IGN COIL 15A P/WDW RH 25A SUNROOF 20A TCU 10A T/SIG 10A PDM2 10A (FOB LP FRT) 15A ABS 10A CLUSTER 10A HAZARD 15A T/BATE OPEN 15A IG 1 10A ECU 10A TAIL LP LH 10A (FOB LP RR) 10A MODULE 15A ROOM LP 10A START 10A TAIL LP RH 10A A/CON 10A *USE THE DESIGNATED FUSE SIZE ONLY. *USE SOLO LOS FUSIBLES ESPECIFICADOS. IG 2 10A PDM1 10A *ИСПОЛЬЗУЙТЕ ТОЛЬКО ПРЕДНАЗНАЦЕННЫЕ ПРЕДОХРАНИТЕЛИ. WIPER RR 15A ACC 10A C/LIGHTER 20A P/OUTLET FRT 15A WIPER FRT 25A HTD MIRR 10A

OAM072026

Description Fuse rating	Protected component
P/WDW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH
P/WDW RH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH
PDM 2 10A PDM,Start/Stop Button Switch, Fob Holder
HAZARD 15A Hazard Relay, Hazard Switch, One Touch Flasher Unit
TAIL LP LH 10A Rear Combination Lamp LH, Head Lamp LH, License Lamp
TAIL LP RH 10A
IG 2 10A BCM, Sunroof Motor
WIPER RR 15A Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
WIPER FRT 25A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper Relay), Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
AMP 25A AMP, ISG Low DC - DC Converter (AMP)
SUNROOF 20A Sunroof Motor
(FOG LP FRT)	15A Front Fog Lamp Relay
T/GATE OPEN	15A Tail Gate Relay, Data Link Connector, DRL Relay
(FOG LP RR)	10A -
A/CON	10A
PDM 1 10A PDM
ACC	10A
C/LIGHTER	20A Cigarette Lighter, Rear Power Outlet

Description Fuse rating Protected component
HTD MIRR 10A ECM/PCM,		Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module, A/V & Navigation Touch
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, 2 Turn Lock Relay
STOP LP 15A			Stop Lamp Switch, Multipurpose Check Connector, HAC Relay, Stop Lamp Relay, Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid
TCU 10A			Vehicle Speed Sensor (M/T), ATM Shift Lever Indicator, ATM Key Lock Control Module, Transaxle Range Switch
ABS 10A ESC Module, ESC Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Multipurpose Check Connector)
IG 1 10A			Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, ISG Low DC - DC Converter (Audio/AMP), Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Switch, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer, ISG Switch, Electro Chromic Mirror, Oil Pump Invertor, Stop Lamp Switch, HAC Relay
P/OUTLET FRT 15A Front Power Outlet
A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Weight Classification Module, Telltale Lamp
IGN COIL 15A G4FD : Condenser, Ignition Coil #1 ~ #4
T/SIG		10A Hazard Switch, Multifunction Switch (Light)
CLUSTER		10A BCM, Instrument Cluster (IND.), A/C Control Module, Smart Key Control Module, PDM
ECU		10A ECM, PCM
START		10A	E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay), PDM, Transaxle Range Switch, Ignition Lock Switch, PCM/ECM
B/UP LP		10A Back-up Lamp Switch (M/T)
A/BAG IND		10A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)
POWER CONNECTOR	MODULE	15A	Audio, RF Receiver, A/V & Navigation Touch, ISG Low DC - DC Converter (Audio), A/V & Navigation Head Unit
	ROOM LP	10A	BCM, Instrument Cluster (IND.), A/C Control Module, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Center Room Lamp, Luggage Lamp, Overhead Console Assembly (Map Lamp), Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch, Vanity Lamp LH/RH

Interior view of a vehicle engine bay with visible internal components and a highlighted component (no text or symbols)

Engine compartment fuse panel

MULTI FUSE : GSL(18790-01031) B+1 INVERTER 50A 50A ALT ABS1 ABS2 RR HTD BLOWER1 MDPS1 125A 40A 40A 40A 40A 80A BLOWER 2 SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 IGN COIL ECU3 SENSOR 3 H/LP LH H/LP RH HTD STRG WIPER B/UP LP(AT) MDPS2 A/CON 10A 10A 10A 15A 20A 15A 10A 10A 15A 10A 10A 10A 10A IG2 IG1 ECU1 H/LP C/FAN B+2 F/PUMP PDM SEAT HEATER ECU2 TCU H/LP HI HORN DEDICATE DRL BLOWER 40A 40A 30A 20A 30A 50A 15A 25A 20A 15A 20A 20A 10A 10A DIAGNOSIS START HORN H/LP H/LP HI F/PUMP MAIN HAC ESS WIPER C/FAN LO C/FAN HI A/CON USE THE DESIGNATED FUSE AND RELAY ONLY 91941-2K020

OAM072027L

Engine 1.6

Description Fuse rating Protected component
MULTI FUSE	B+ 1 50A		I/P Junction Box (Power Window Relay, Fuse - P/WDW LH 25A, P/WDW RH 25A, PDM 2 10A, HAZARD 15A)
	INVERTER 50A Oil Pump Invertor
	ALT 125A		Alternator, Fuse (ABS 2 40A, ABS 1 40A, RR HTD 40A, BLOWER1 40A, MDPS 80A, A/CON 10A)
	ABS 1 40A ESC Module
	ABS 2 40A ESC Module
	RR HTD 40A I/P Junction Box (Rear Defogger Relay)
	BLOWER 1 40A Blower Relay
	MDPS 1 80A EPS Control Module
FUSE	IG 2 40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box(IG 1 Realty), Start Relay
	IG 1 40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box(IG 2 Realty)
	ECU 1 30A Engine Control Relay
	H/LP	20A H/LP	Relay
	C/FAN 30A C/Fan HI Relay, C/Fan Low Relay
	B+2	50A	I/P Junction Box (Tail Lamp Relay, Fuse - TAIL LP LH 10A, TAIL LP RH 10A, SUNROOF 20A, AMP 25A, DR LOCK 20A, STOP LP 15A, T/GATE OPEN 15A, (FOG LP FRT) 15A, Power Connector - ROOM LP 10A, MODULE 15A)
	F/PUMP 15A F/Pump Relay
	PDM	25A PDM, Smart Key Control Module
	SEAT HEATER	20A Driver Seat Warmer, Passenger Seat Warmer
	ECU 2 15A PCM/ECM
	H/LP HI	20A H/LP	HI Relay
	HORN 10A Horn Relay
FUSE	DEDICATE DRL 10A BCM
	BLOWER 2 10A A/C Control Module (Auto)
	SENSOR 1 10A -
	SENSOR 2 10A		C/Fan HI/Low Relay, PCM/ECM, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, Immobilizer Module, A/Con Relay
	IGN COIL 15A -
	ECU 3 20A -
	SENSOR 3 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down), F/Pump Relay, Oil Control Valve #1/#2, PCM/ECM
	H/LP LH 10A Head Lamp LH
	H/LP RH 10A Head Lamp RH
	HTD STRG 15A -
	WIPER 10A PCM
	B/UP LP (AP)	10A	Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Combination Lamp LH/RH, Instrument Cluster, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Audio
	MDPS 2	10A EPS	Control Module
	A/CON	10A A/Con Relay

Engine 2.0

Description Fuse rating Protected component
MULTI FUSE	B+ 1 50A		I/P Junction Box (Power Window Relay, Fuse - P/WDW LH 25A, P/WDW RH 25A, PDM 2 10A, HAZARD 15A)
	INVERTER 50A Oil	Pump Invertor
	ALT 125A		Alternator, Fuse (ABS 2 40A, ABS 1 40A, RR HTD 40A, BLOWER1 40A, MDPS 80A, A/CON 10A)
	ABS 1 40A ESC Module
	ABS 2 40A ESC Module
	RR HTD 40A I/P Junction Box (Rear Defogger Relay)
	BLOWER 1 40A Blower Relay
	MDPS 1 80A EPS Control Module
FUSE	IG 2 40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box(IG 1 Realty), Start Relay
	IG 1 40A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box(IG 2 Realty)
	ECU 1 30A Engine Control Relay
	H/LP	20A H/LP	Relay
	C/FAN 30A C/Fan HI Relay, C/Fan Low Relay
	B+2	50A	I/P Junction Box (Tail Lamp Relay, Fuse - TAIL LP LH 10A, TAIL LP RH 10A, SUNROOF 20A, AMP 25A, DR LOCK 20A, STOP LP 15A, T/GATE OPEN 15A, (FOG LP FRT) 15A, Power Connector - ROOM LP 10A, MODULE 15A)
	F/PUMP 15A F/Pump Relay
	PDM	25A PDM, Smart Key Control Module
	SEAT HEATER	20A Driver Seat Warmer, Passenger Seat Warmer
	ECU 2 15A PCM/ECM
	TCU	20A PCM
	H/LP HI	20A H/LP	HI Relay
	HORN 10A Horn Relay
FUSE	DEDICATE DRL 10A BCM
	BLOWER 2 10A A/C Control Module (Auto)
	SENSOR 1 10A		Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2, Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Canister Control Valve, A/Con Relay, Immobilizer Module
	SENSOR 2 10A C/Fan HI/Low Relay, Injector #1 ~ #4
	IGN COIL 15A Ignition Coil #1 ~ #4, Condenser
	ECU 3 20A PCM/ECM
	SENSOR 3 15A		Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down), F/Pump Relay, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve
	H/LP LH 10A Head	Lamp LH
	H/LP RH 10A Head	Lamp RH
	HTD STRG 15A -
	WIPER 10A PCM
	B/UP LP (AP)	10A	Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Combination Lamp LH/RH, Instrument Cluster, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Audio
	MDPS 2	10A EPS	Control Module
	A/CON	10A A/Con Relay

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle's finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle's finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

Black-and-white photo of a car with open hood and exhaust pipe, no visible text or symbols

CAUTION - Wetting engine

• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.
- Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Waxing

A good coat of wax is a barrier between your paint and contaminate. Keeping a good coat of wax on your vehicle will help protect it.

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer's instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

CAUTION - Drying vehicle

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-body and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

Aluminum or chrome wheel maintenance

The aluminum or chrome wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum or chrome wheels. They may scratch or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid detergent. It may damage and corrode the aluminum or chrome wheels coated with a clear protective finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, we produce vehicles of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle's surface by moisture that evaporate slowly.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it dries slowly and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.

- If you live in a high-corrosion area — where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the vehicle, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting and cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle.

These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the dashboard, wipe them off immediately. See the instructions for the proper way to clean vinyl.

CAUTION - Electrical components

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTION - Leather

When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric's appearance and fire-resistant properties.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with a glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION - Rear windows

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage of the rear window defroster grid.

The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Warranty & Maintenance booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control systems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized Kia dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance Test (With Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from mis-firing during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.

• Crankcase emission control system

The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system.

1. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system

The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.

(The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

- If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, be careful not to damage.

Engine exhaust gas precautions (carbon monoxide)

- Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions on this page to avoid CO poisoning.

• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

WARNING - Catalytic converter

Keep away from the catalytic converter and exhaust system while the vehicle is running or immediately thereafter. The exhaust and catalytic systems are very hot and may burn you.

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING - Fire

• Do not park, idle or drive the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc. A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

Maintenance

Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle. Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.

Engine / 8-2

Dimensions / 8-2

Bulb wattage / 8-3

Tires and wheels / 8-4

Weight/Volume / 8-4

Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-5

Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-7

Vehicle certification label / 8-7

Tire specification and pressure label / 8-8

Engine number / 8-8

Refrigerant label / 8-8

Specifications & Consumer information

ENGINE

Item	1.6L	2.0L
Displacement [cc (cu. in)]	1591 (1.6)	1999 (121.9)
Bore x Stroke [mm(in.)]	77 x 85.44(3.03 x 3.36)	81 x 97(3.18 x 3.81)
Firing order	1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders	4, In-line

DIMENSIONS

Item		mm (in)
Overall length		4120 (162.2)
Overall width		1785 (70.3)
Overall height		1610 (63.4) / 1660 (65.4)* ^1
Front tread	195/65R15	1570 (61.8)
	205/55R16	1555 (61.2)
	235/45R18	1535 (60.4)
Rear tread	195/65R15	1585 (62.4)
	205/55R16	1575 (62.0)
	235/45R18	1550 (61.0)
Wheelbase		2550 (100.4)

*1 with roof rack

BULB WATTAGE

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb Type
Headlights (Low) 55 H7
Headlights (High) 55 H11B
Front turn signal lights/position light (LED)*	LED LED
Front turn signal lights/Position light (Bulb)	28/8 2357
Side turn signal lights (Fender) 5 W5W
Side turn signal lights(Outside mirror)*	LED LED
Front side marker lights 5 W5W
Front fog lights* 27 H27W
Tail lights	5 W5W
Tail lights and rear side marker	28/8 2357
Stop and tail lights (Bulb)	28/8 2357
Stop and tail lights (LED)*	LED LED
Rear turn signal lights	27	1156NA
Back-up lights	16	92
High mounted stop light (Bulb)	5 W5W
High mounted stop light (LED)*	LED LED
License plate lights	5 W5W
Map lamps	10	W10W
Room lamp	10	FASTEN 10W
Luggage lamp*	5 FASTEN 5W
Glove box lamp*	5 FASTEN 5W
Vanity mirror lamp*	5 FASTEN 5W

* If equipped

TIRES AND WHEELS

Item		Tire size	Wheel size	Cold tire inflation pressure kPa (psi)				Wheel lug nut torque kg·m (lb·ft, N·m)
				Normal speed/load*1		High speed*2/ Maximum load
				Front R	Rear Front	Rear
Compact spare tire (if equipped)	Full size tire	P195/65R15 6	0J×15 230 230	240 240				9~11(65~79, 88~107)
		P205/55R16 6	5J×16 (33) (33)	(35) (35)
	T125/80D15 4	0T×15	420 420	420 420
			(60) (60)	(60) (60)
Compact spare tire (if equipped)	Full size tire	P235/45R18 7	5J×18	230 230	240 240
			(33) (33)	(35) (35)
	T125/80D16 4	0T×16	420 420	420 420
			(60) (60)	(60) (60)

*1 Normal load : Up to 3 persons
^*2 High speed : above 160 km/h (100 mph)

CAPACITY/WEIGHT

Item	1.6 Engine 2.0 Engine
	M/T A/T M/T	A/T
Gross vehicle weightkg (lbs.)	1665 (3671) 1685	(3715) 1740	(3836) 1760	(3880)
Luggage volumel (cu ft)	340 (12)		340 (12)

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume			Classification
Engine oil *1 *2(drain and refill) API recommended (or equivalent) TOTAL QUARTZ	1.6 Engine 3.3 l (3.49 US qt.)		^3 or aboveILSAC GF-4 or above
	2.0 Engine 4.0 l (4.23 US qt.)
Manual transaxle fluid	1.6 Engine	1.8~1.9 l(1.9~2.0 US qt.)	API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life)
	2.0 Engine	1.9~2.0 l(2.0~2.11 US qt.)
Automatic transaxle fluid	1.6 Engine 7.3 l (7.71 US qt.)		MICHANG ATF SP-IVSK ATF SP-IVNOCA ATF SP-IVKia genuine ATF SP-IV.
	2.0 Engine 7.1 l (7.5 US qt.)

^1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
^2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year's time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Lubricant Volume			Classification
Coolant	1.6 Engine	6.5 l (6.87 US qt.)	Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
	2.0 Engine	6.4 l (6.76 US qt.)
Brake/Clutch fluid		0.7~0.8 l(0.7~0.8 US qt.)	FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel		48 l (12.68 US gal.)	Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1

Recommended SAE viscosity number

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature °C(°F)	-30	-20	-10	0	10	20	30	40	50
	-10	0	20	40	60	80	100	120
GasolineEngine Oil *1	10W-30
	5W-20 (5W-30)

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

Close-up of a car interior showing a highlighted arm and seat, with no visible text or symbols.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. The number is punched on the floor under the front passenger seat. To check the number, remove the cover (1).

VIN LabelFrame Number OVQ076002N

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

Close-up of a car interior showing structural components and a highlighted circular area (no text or symbols)

The vehicle certification label attached on the driver's side center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL

Close-up of a car's front panel showing the door and seat, with a dotted line highlighting a component (no text or symbols visible)

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.

ENGINE NUMBER

Engine 1.6 ORB080005 Engine 2.0 OAM082007L

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

REFRIGERANT LABEL (IF EQUIPPED)

Interior view of a car door frame with a highlighted component and a yellow arrow pointing to a white square (no text or symbols)

The refrigerant label is located on the underside of the hood.